7M    070 

No.  1761 


HANDBOOK  OF  THE 

2.95-INCH 
MOUNTAIN  GUN  MATERIEL 

AND 

PACK  OUTFIT 


(Twenty-five  Plates) 


JUNE  10,  1912 
REVISED  SEPTEMBER  15, 1916 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 
1916 


GIFT  OF 


No.  1761 


HANDBOOK  OF  THE 

2.95-INCH 
MOUNTAIN  GUN  MATERIEL 

AND 

PACK  OUTFIT 


( Twenty-five  Plates ) 


JUNE  10,  1912 
REVISED  SEPTEMBER  15,  1916 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 
1916 


i.e.. 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
OFFICE  OF  THE  CHIEF  OF  ORDNANCE, 

Washington,  September  15,  1916. 

This  Manual  is  published  for  the  information  and  government  of  the  Regular  Army 
and  National  Guard  of  the  United  States. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

WILLIAM  CROZIER, 
Brigadier  General,  Chief  of  Ordnance. 
(3) 


849135 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 

List  of  plates 7 

List  of  equipment , 9 

The  gun: 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 11 

Nomenclature  of  parts 11 

Serial  list  of  component  parts  of  breech  mechanism 12 

Description  of 12 

Mechanism : 

Action  of . 14 

Mounting  and  dismounting 15 

Ammunition 16 

Cartridge  case 16 

Primer 16 

Powder  charge 18 

The  projectile 18 

Common  shrapnel •. 18 

Frankford  Arsenal  combination  fuze,  model  of  1907  M 19 

Frankford  Arsenal  combination  fuze,  model  of  1915 22 

Base  percussion  fuze,  medium  and  major  caliber 23 

Marking  on  ammunition  packing  boxes 23 

Blank  ammunition 24 

The  cartridge  c  ase 24 

The  primer 25 

The  charge 25 

Preparation  of  blank  metallic  ammunition 25 

Precautions  to  be  observed 26 

Care  of  cartridge  cases 26 

Reloading  and  cleaning  outfit 27 

Misfires  and  hangfires 27 

Hand  fuze  setter,  model  of  1905  M .- 28 

Range  table,  12^-pound  projectile t 29 

Hand  fuze  setter,  model  of  1912 30 

Disassembling  and  assembling 31 

Adjusting 32 

Operation ' 32 

Care  and  preservation 33 

Range  table,  18-pound  projectile 34 

Subcaliber  cartridge 34 

Drill  cartridge 35 

Subcaliber  and  drill  cartridge  kit 36 

Carriage: 

"Weights,  dimensions,  etc 37 

Nomenclature  of  parts 37 

General  description  of  carriage 39 

(5) 


Detailed  description  of  carriage:  Page. 

The  cradle 39 

The  buffer  mechanism 40 

Cradle  axis  bolt 40 

Elevating  gear 40 

The  trail 41 

Theaxletree 42 

The  wheels 42 

Dismounting  and  mounting  gun  and  carriage 43 

To  fill  buffer  cylinders , 44 

Care  and  cleaning  of  parts 45 

Sights: 

Sight  model  of  1912 47 

Open  sight 48 

Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1904 49 

Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1915 52 

Use  of  the  open  sight 58 

Use  of  the  panoramic  sight 58 

Care  of  sights 58 

Adjustment  of  sights 60 

Verification  of  parallelism  of  line  of  sight  and  axis  of  bore 62 

Additional  tests 63 

Tools  and  accessories  for  the  gun  and  Carriage,  description 65 

The  pack  harness: 

Description 67 

Instructions  for  setting  up  the  aparejo 69 

Care  of  leather 72 

The  special  pack  equipment: 

Nomenclature 73 

Description 73 

Tools  and  accessaries  for  special  pack  equipment: 

Nomenclature 76 

Description 76 

Dummy  pack 78 

Allowance  of  ammunition 79 

General  information: 

Painting  artillery  material 80 

Oils  for  artillery  material • 81 

Repairs  for  field  artillery  material 82 

Suggestions  for  care  and  maintenance  of  material 83 

Supplies  in  general 84 

Method  of  loading  the  battery  equipment  on  railroad  cars 85 

Equipment 85 

Statement  of  total  equipment  for  one  mountain-gun  battery 86 

Index..  103 


LIST  OF  PLATES. 


Faces  page. 

PLATE  I.  2.95-inch  mountain  gun ". .  11 

II.  Breech  mechanism 12 

III.  Breech  mechanism 14 

IV.  Projectiles 16 

V.  Combination  fuze  and  base  percussion  fuze 22 

VI.  Handfuze  setter,  model  of  1912  and  1905  M 28 

VII.  Subcaliber  and  drill  cartridge 34 

VIII.  2.95-inch  mountain  gun  carriage 37 

IX.  Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1904 49 

X.  Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1915 52 

XI.  Aparejo,  model  of  1911,  frame,  left  half 68 

XII.  Cradle  mule 72 

XIII.  Wheel  mule 73 

XIV.  Trail  mule 74 

XV.  Gun  mule 75 

XVI.  Pioneer  tools  (roll  open) 74 

XVII.  Pioneer  tools  (roll  closed). 75 

XVIII.  Blacksmith's  roll 74 

XIX.  Supply  mule 75 

XX.  Saddler's  tool  kit 74 

XXI.  Signal  mule 75 

XXII.  Carpenter's  tool  kit » ..."  76 

XXIII.  Special  pack  equipment 77 

XXIV.  Schaller  forge,  model  of  1910 78 

XXV.  Blacksmith's  tool  kit 79 

(7) 


HANDBOOK    OF   THE   2.95-INCH    MOUNTAIN    GUN 
MATERIEL   AND    PACK    OUTFIT. 


List  of  equipment  furnished  by  the  Ordnance  Department  pertaining  to  one  mountain 
batten/  equipped  with  2.95  inch  mountain  gun  materiel. 


No.                                                             Equipment. 

Class. 

Section. 

4     2  95-inch  mountain  gun 

4     2.9.5-inch  mountain-gun  carriage  equipped  v.  ith  open  and  panoramic  sights 

84     Ammunition  chests 

24     Pack  covers  for  kits 

IV 

2 

8     Pioneer  rolls  

4     Supply  chests 

1     Schaller  forge  and  tool  chest  

79     Pack  harness 

1 

For  description,  this  equipment  is  divided  into  the  folio  wing  parts: 
Part  I.  The  equipment  issued  with  each  gun  and  carriage — 
(a)  The  gun,  ammunition,  and  accompanying  parts. 
(6)  The  carriage  and  sights. 

(c)  Tools  and  accessories  for  the  gun  and  carriage. 
Part  II.  The  packs  for  one  battery— 
(a)  The  pack  harness. 
(&)  The  special  pack  equipment. 

(c)  The  tools  and  accessories  for  special  pack  equipment. 
Part  III.  Allowance  of  ammunition  and  targets. 
Part  IV.  General  information. 

A  description  of  each  of  these  parts,  together  with  a  statement  of 
the  total  equipment  issued  to  one  mountain  battery,  follows: 

(9) 


Part    I    (a).   THE    GUN,    AMMUNITION,    AND    ACCOMPANYING 

PARTS.      • 


The  gun,  weights,  dimensions,  etc. 

Weight  of  gun,  including  breech  mechanism pounds. .  236 

Caliber inches. .  2.  953 

Total  length do. ...  35.  85 

Length  of  bore,  including  chamber :. ,1 do 31 .  6 

Length  of  rifled  portion  of  bore do. ...  24.  33 

Rifling,  uniform.  1  turn  in  25  calibers,  right-hand  twist: 

Number  of  grooves 30 

Width  of  grooves inch. .  .  23 

Depth  of  grooves do .  023 

Capaci1  y  of  powder  chamber cubic  inches. .  '  34.  9 

f  1 2  5 
Wei  ;:ht  of  projectiles. . .  pounds. .         -Lg' 

Weight  of  powder  charge  (N.  (\  smokeless): 

For  12i-pound  projectile ounces. .  8 

For  18-pound  projectile do —  .  7 

Weight  of  cartridge  case pounds. .  1. 45 

Mu/zle  velocity: 

J  2.1 -pound  projectile feet  per  second . .  920 

18-pound  projectile do 750 

Maximum  chamber  pressure pounds  per  square  inch. .     18,  000 

Nomenclature  of  parts  of  gun. 
Part.  Description  or  location.  Class.     Section. 

Body With  lugs  for  carrier  and  piston  rods  integral 

Guide  button Screwed  into barrel  underneath : . . 

Eyebolt On  rear  of  barrel,  interchangeable  with  eyebolt  on 

cradle. 

Breechbloclc In  breech  of  gun 

Pallet,  hardened  steel Attached  to  breechblock  with  2  screws 

Fixing  screw Secures  cockjng  cam  in  breechblock 

Carrier Pivoted  to  breech  of  gun  body 

Carrier  axis  pin With  split  pin  fixes  carrier  to  gun 

Cocking  cam In  breechblock 

Extractor Pivoted  to  breech  near  carrier  hinge 

Extractor  axis  pin With  split  pin  fixes  extractor  to  gun 

Firing  pin In  center  of  breechblock 

Firing-pin  point Screwed  into  firing  pin 

Guide  plate On  rear  of  breechblock 

Hand  lever Pivoted  to  carrier IV 

Hand-lever  axis  pin With  split  pin  fixes  lever  to  carrier 

Hand-lever  catch Locks  hand  lever  in  closed  position  to  carrier 

Hand-lever  catch  spring !  Actuates  hand-lever  catch. I 

Hand-lever  catch  pivot Special  split  pin 

Locking  bolt .' In  a  recess  in  the  carrier 

Locking-bolt  rivet Secures  the  locking-bolt  spring  to  bolt 

Lock ing -bolt  spring Actuates  the  locking  bolt 

Mainspring Coiled  spring  in  firing  pin 

Trigger  sear Pivoted  in  carrier 

Trigger  sear  spring Returns  the  trigger  sear  to  engagement 

Trigger,  complete,  consisting 
of-- 

Trigger Assembled  in  breech  of  barrel,  left  side 

Trigger  lever With  split  pin,  has  an  eye  for  lanyard 

Trigger  spring Coiled  spring  on  trigger 


(ID 


'    '      "     '       v<  /""'/ 7 '-list  of  component  parts  of  breech  mechanism. 

[Numbers  before  components  refer  to  numbers  shown  on  Plates  II  and  III.] 


Class.     Section. 


1 .  Breechblock 

2.  Carrier 

3.  Hand  lever ». 

4.  Firing  pin  (with  removable  point) : 

5.  Mainspring 

6.  Guide  plate 

7.  Extractor 

8.  Locking  bolt  (with  spring) 

9.  Sear  (with  spring) 

9a.  Sear  stud ,. 

9?).  Sear  bent 

9c.  Sear  safety  arm 

9d.  Sear  actuating  arm 

9e.  Sear  spring 

10.  Trigger  and  spring  with  trigger  lever  and  split  pin 

11.  Gear  segment  of  breechblock 

12.  Hand-lever  bevel  pinion 

13.  Cocking  piece,  showing  cams IV 

14.  Studs  on  firing  pin 

15.  Safety  groove  in  breechblock 

16.  Groove  in  breechblock  in  which  projection  on  trigger-sear  safety  arm  travels  during 

unlocking 

17.  Protection  on  trigger-sear  safety  arm 

18.  Carrier  axis  pin  (with  split  pin) 

19   Hand-lever  catch  (lower  portion) 

20.  Hand-lever  axis-pin  lugs 

21.  Hand-lever  axis  pin  (with  split  pin) 

22.  Hand -lever  stop 

23^-Hand-lever  catch  (with  split  pin) 

24.  Hand-lever  catch  spring : 

25.  Firing-pin  recocking  hook 

26.  Firing-pin  bent : 

27.  Extractor  axis  pin  (with  split  pin) 

28.  Short  arm  of  extractor 

29.  Spring  catches  for  piston  rod  (with  screw,  washer,  and  spring) 


DESCRIPTION    OF    THE    GUN. 

The  2.95-inch  mountain  gun  is  designed  for  pack  transportation 
and  consequent  rapid  assemblage  to,  and  dismounting  from,  its 
carriage.  The  term  "gun"  is  used  to  include  the  body  of  the  piece 
and  breech  mechanism.  The  body  is  one  piece  of  steel  having  in 
addition  to  the  usual  lugs  provided  for  the  hinge  of  a  swinging 
breechblock  two  others,  at  right  and  left  of  the  breech,  for  attach- 
ment to  the  piston  rods  of  the  carriage.  The  exterior  of  the  body 
for  a  distance  of  8.5  inches  forward  of  these  lugs  is  cylindrical  and, 
supplemented  by  two  collars  of  the  same  diameter  formed  farther 
forward,  constitutes  the  bearing  of  the  gun  in  the  cradle.  The 
guide  button  on  the  bottom  of  the  barrel  slides  in  a  groove  in  the 
cradle  and  resists  the  twist  due  to  the  rifling.  The  vertical  and 
horizontal  planes  passing  through  the  axis  of  the  bore  are  indicated 
on  the  muzzle  by  the  grooves  cut  in  the  metal.  Fine  threads  or 
wires  may  be  stretched  across  in  these  grooves  to  make  a  front 
bore  sight  for  use  in  verifying  sights,  etc.  An  eyebolt  is  threaded 
into  the  body  at  the  breech  for  lifting  the  gun. 

The  breech  mechanism  consists  of  the  breechblock  and  cocking 
cam,  carrier,  hand  lever,  firing  pin,  mainspring,  guide  plate,  ex- 
tractor, locking  bolt,  trigger  sear,  and  trigger. 


REAR    VIEW      BREECH       (CLOSED) 


plate 


13 

Breechblock. — The  breechblock  locks  into  the  body  with  an  inter- 
rupted screw.  The  center  of  the  block  is  chambered  in  front  for  the 
firing  pin  and  in  rear  for  the  cocking  cam,  the  latter  being  separate 
from  the  block  for  manufacturing  reasons  only  and  solidly  secured  to 
it  by  two  lugs  and  the  fixing  screw.  In  the  rear  face  of  the  breech- 
block are  cut  two  concentric  grooves  and  with  the  partition  between 
them  cut  away  in  two  places  to  allow  the  projection  on  the  end  of  the 
safety  arm  of  the  sear  which  engages  these  grooves  to  pass  from  one 
to  the  other.  On  the  rear  face  of  the  breechblock  is  a  circular  toothed 
segment  which  is  engaged  by  the  segmental  bevel  pinion  of  the  hand 
lever.  There  is  also  a  recess  on  the  rear  face  of  the  block  lined  with 
a  hardened  steel  pallet  into  which  the  locking  bolt  enters  when  the 
block  is  revolved  sufficiently  to  disengage  the  interrupted  threads; 
the  locking  bolt  then  preventing  further  rotation  of  the  block  while 
moving  with  the  carrier  in  and  out  of  the  breech. 

<  (irricr. — The  carrier  which  holds  the  breechblock  is  pivoted  to  the 
right  side  of  the  breech  by  the  carrier  axis  pin.  It  is  bored  partly 
through  and  threaded  to  engage  the  continuous  threads  at  the  rear 
end  of  the  breechblock.  A  reduced  bore  passes  through  the  carrier 
and  receives  a  boss  on  the  guide  plate.  A  recess  on  the  inner  or 
front  face  receives  the  locking  bolt  and  its  spring,  which  is  secured  to 
the  locking  bolt  by  a  rivet ;  a  recess  in  the  lower  hand-lever  axis-pin 
lug  on  the  carrier  engages  the  hand-lever  catch,  thereby  securing  the 
hand  lever  when  the  breech  is  closed.  On  the  rear  face  of  the  carrier 
are  two  lugs.  The  hand-lever  axis  pin  passes  through  holes  in  these 
and  through  a  hole  in  the  guide  plate  which  it  secures  in  place. 
Between  the  two  lugs  is  a  slot  which  embraces  the  stud  on  the  rear 
face  of  the  trigger  sear. 

Hand  lever. — The  hand  lever  is  pivoted  to  the  carrier  by  the  hand- 
lever  axis  pin.  The  handle  or  grip  is  recessed  to  receive  the  hand- 
lever  catch,  which  is  pivoted  in  the  hand  lever  by  a  large  split  pin 
(hand-lever  catch  pivot),  a  leaf  spring  (hand-lever  catch  spring)  being 
seated  in  the  catch  to  insure  its  engagement  when  the  breech  is  closed. 
The  segmental  bevel  pinion  of  the  hand  lever  is  concentric  with  the 
axis  pin  and  engages  the  toothed  segment  of  the  breechblock.  When 
the  hand  lever  has  been  pulled  around  on  its  axis  until  the  breech- 
block is  properly  disengaged,  a  projection  on  the  hand  lever  adjoining 
the  pinion  contacts  with  the  rear  face  of  the  block  and  prevents 
further  rotation  of  the  hand  lever.  The  hand  levers  that  were 
manufactured  at  Watervliet  Arsenal  are  not  interchangeable  with 
those  of  guns  purchased  from  Vicker's  Sons  &  Maxim. 

Firing  pin. — The  firing  pin  is  a  hollow  sleeve  provided  with  two 
lugs  which  ride  upon  the  cam  surfaces  of  the  cocking  cam.  A  hook, 
which  extends  to  the  rear  through  recesses  in  the  carrier  and  the  guide 
plate,  prevents  the  firing  pin  from  turning  when  the  breechblock  is 


14 

rotated  and  makes  recocking  possible  without  opening  the  breech. 
Near  the  rear  end  of  the  body  of  the  firing  pin  the  metal  is  cut  away, 
forming  a  bend  or  notch  into  which  an  arm  of  the  trigger  sear  drops. 
The  firing-pin  point  is  screwed  into  the  firing  pin  and  is  replaceable. 

Mainspring. — The  mainspring  is  a  helical  spring  which  fits  inside 
the  hollow  in  the  center  of  the  firing  pin  and  into  a  recess  in  the 
guide  plate.  The  guide  plate  retains  it  in  place. 

Guide  plate. — The  hand-lever  axis  pin  passes  through  a  hole  in  the 
guide  plate,  thus  retaining  it  in  position.  The  guide  plate  is  recessed 
to  receive  the  mainspring,  and  recesses  on  the  sides  allow  the  recock- 
ing hook  of  the  firing  pin  and  the  sear  stud  to  pass  through. 

Extractor. — The  extractor  is,  pi  voted  near  the  carrier  hinge  on  the 
extractor-axis  pin.  At  the  end  of  the  extracting  arms  are  claws 
which  engage  with  the  rim  of  the  cartridge.  It  is  actuated  by  the 
carrier  striking  against  its  short  arm  just  before  the  breech  is  fully 
open. 

Locking  bolt. — The  locking  bolt  fits  in  a  recess  in  the  front  face  of 
the  carrier.  When  the  breechblock  is  fully  rotated  ready  to  swing 
out,  a  recess  formed  in  it  comes  opposite  the  bolt,  which  latter,  acted 
on  by  its  spring,  moves  forward  and  locks  the  block  to  the  carrier. 
The  locking-bolt  spring  is  secured  to  the  locking  bolt  by  a  rivet. 

Trigger  sear. — The  trigger  sear  is  pivoted  to  the  carrier  by  means 
of  a  stud  which  fits  in  a  groove  in  the  center  of  the  carrier  and  is 
secured  there  by  the  guide  plate.  Safety  during  loading  is  provided 
by  means  of  the  arm,  which  has  a  projection  at  its  outer  extremity 
which  engages  in  the  groove  during  the  period  when  the  breechblock 
is  being  locked.  While  this  projection  is  in  this  outer  groove  the 
firing  pin  is  engaged  by  the  sear,  so  that  the  firing  pin  can  not  move 
forward  and  strike  the  primer.  The  sear  has  also  another  arm  the 
outer  end  of  which  lies  above  the  trigger  lever  when  the  breech- 
block is  home.  The  arm  has  the  sear  spring  attached  to  it,  which 
causes  the  sear  to  engage  the  firing  pin  in  the  cocked  position. 

Trigger. — A  square  shaft  on  the  trigger  passes  through  a  square 
hole  in  the  trigger  lever  and  is  held  in  place  by  a  split  pin.  The 
trigger  is  fitted  in  the  breech  of  the  gun ;  the  trigger  lever  terminates 
in  a  loop  to  which  a  lanyard  can  be  attached.  When  this  is  pulled 
the  trigger  revolves,  causing  the  trigger  to  lift  up  the  arm  of  the  sear 
and  so  release  the  firing  pin  from  the  sear.  The  trigger  is  kept  in 
its  normal  position  by  the  small  spring  called  the  "trigger  spring." 

ACTION    OF    MECHANISM. 

On  grasping  the  handle  of  the  hand  lever  the  hand-lever  catch  is 
pressed  in  and  its  lower  extremity  thereby  moved  clear  of  the  recess 
in  the  lower  hand-lever  axis-pin  lug  so  that  the  hand  lever  is  ur locked. 
On  moving  the  handle  to  the  right  the  bevel  pinion  thereon  causes  the 


15 

breechblock  to  rotate.  The  rotation  of  the  breechblock  when  being 
unlocked  causes  the,  lugs  on  the  firing  pin  (which  can  not  rotate)  to 
ride  on  the  surface  cams  of  the  cocking  cam,  thus  compressing  the 
mainspring;  when  the  firing  pin  reaches  the  cocked  position,  the  sear 
is  forced  by  the  action  of  the  sear  spring  to  engage  with  the  firing  pin, 
and  at  the  same  time  the  lug  on  the  safety  arm,  which  has  traveled 
along  the  inner  groove,  is  forced  outward  to  the  entrance  of  the 
groove;  the  threads  on  the  breechblock  are  now  clear  of  those  in  the 
breech  of  the  gun  and  at  this  instant  the  hand-lever  stop  bears  against 
the  face  of  the  breechblock  and  the  locking  bolt  moves  forward,  lock- 
ing the  breechblock  to  the  carrier  so  that  the  continued  motion  of  the 
hand  lever  causes  both  to  swing  away  from  the  breech  together. 
When  the  block  is  clear  of  the  breech  the  carrier  strikes  the  short  arm 
of  the  extractor,  causing  the  latter  to  eject  the  empty  cartridge  case 
to  the  rear. 

A  new  cartridge  is  inserted  by  hand,  and,  on  moving  the  hand  lever 
to  the  left,  the  breechblock  (which  is  still  locked  to  the  carrier)  enters 
the  breech  and  forces  the  cartridge  home.  As  soon  as  the  carrier 
comes  against  the  face  of  the  breech  the  locking  bolt  is  pressed  in, 
releasing  the  breechblock  from  the  carrier,  so  that  the  continued 
motion  of  the  hand  lever  causes  the  block  to  revolve  by  means  of  the 
pinion,  thus  locking  it  securely  in  the  breech.  As  soon  as  the  hand 
lever  is  quite  home  the  lower  end  of  the  hand-lever  catch,  actuated 
by  the  hand-lever  catch  spring,  engages  in  the  recess  in  the  lower 
hand-lever  axis-pin  lug.  The  outer  end  of  the  arm  of  the  trigger  sear 
is  now  above  the  trigger,  so  that  on  pulling  the  lanyard  (which  is 
attached  to  the  trigger  lever)  sharply  to  the  rear,  the  arm  of  the 
trigger  sear  is  lifted  up  and  the  firing  pin  is  released  from  the  sear,  so 
that  moving  forward  by  the  action  of  the  mainspring  it  strikes  against 
the  primer  and  explodes  the  charge. 

In  the  event  of  a  misfire  the* mechanism  can  be  recocked  by  placing 
the  loop  of  the  lanyard  over  the  recocking  hook  of  the  firing  pin  and 
pulling  sharply  to  the  rear  until  the  sear  engages  the  firing  pin  and 
retains  it. 

DISMOUNTING   AND    MOUNTING   THE    BREECH   MECHANISM. 

Dismounting. — Remove  split  pins  from  the  axis  pins  for  hand  lever, 
carrier,  and  extractor. 

Close  the  breech  and  release  the  mainspring. 

Press  in  guide  plate  and  take  out  hand-lever  axis  pin. 

Remove  guide  plate,  mainspring,  and  firing  pin. 

Replace  hand-lever  axis  pin  and  open  breech. 

Take  out  hand-lever  axis  pin  and  remove  hand  lever. 

Press  in  locking  bolt  and  unscrew  breechblock  from  carrier. 

Remove  sear,  locking  bolt,  and  spring. 


16 

Take  out  carrier  axis  pin  and  remove  carrier. 

Take  out  extractor  axis  pin  and  remove  extractor. 

Mounting. — The  assembling  of  the  mechanism  is  performed  in  the 
reverse  order  to  that  of  dismounting. 

In  inserting  the  block  into  the  carrier  the  former  should  be  held 
squarely  against  the  face  in  such  a  position  that  the  slot  for  the  lock- 
ing bolt  is  just  under  the  slot  in  the  carrier  for  the  sear  before  com- 
mencing to  screw  it  in. 

AMMUNITION. 

(Plate  IV.) 

Fixed  ammunition  is  used  in  the  2.95-inch  mountain  guns,  and  is 
made  up  with  the  following  types  of  projectiles: 

Common  steel  shell,  12^  pounds. 

Common  shrapnel,  12 J  pounds. 

Cast-iron  shell,  12  J  pounds. 

Cast-iron  shell,  1 8  pounds. 

No  more  18-pound  projectiles  or  cast-iron  shell  will  be  manufac- 
tured. Shell  of  future  manufacture  will  be  of  steel. 

The  rounds  as  made  up  vary  in  length  with  the  type  of  projectile 
used.  The  number  of  each  kind  to  be  carried  is  a  matter  for  regula- 
tion by  proper  authority.  Each  round  is  issued  with  projectile  filled 
and  fuzed.  The  weights  of  the  projectiles  are  12^  and  18  pounds. 
The  components  of  one  round  are  the  cartridge  case  with  primer, 
the  powder  charge,  projectile,  and  fuze. 

THE    CARTRIDGE    CASE. 

The  cartridge  case  (PI.  IV)  is  a  solid  drawn-brass  case  6.58  inches 
long;  it  has  a  capacity  of  34.9  cubic  inches  and  weighs,  empty,  1.45 
pounds.  The  head  of  the  case  has  a  projecting  flange  or  rim  under 
which  the  lip  of  the  extractor  engages.  The  center  of  the  head  is 
bored  out  to  form  a  seat,  into  which  the  primer  is  forced.  These 
primer  seats  are  first  mandreled  to  near  the  finished  dimensions  with 
a  tapered  steel  plug  to  toughen  the  metal  of  the  cartridge  case  around 
the  primer  seat  and  then  reamed  to  finished  size.  This  toughening 
is  necessary  to  prevent  expansion  of  the  seats  under  gas  pressure  and 
consequent  loose  fit  of  the  primers  in  subsequent  firing.  The  primers 
are  inserted  in  the  case  by  the  small  primer-inserting  press  to  avoid 
injury  to  the  primer  seat.  Special  decapping  tools  are  also  issued  for 
use  in  removing  exploded  primers  from  cartridge  cases. 

THE    PRIMER. 

To  insure  the  ignition  of  smokeless-powder  charges  in  cartridge 
cases  it  is  necessary  that  the  primers  either  contain  in  themselves,  in 
addition  to  the  percussion  composition,  an  auxiliary  charge  of  black 


FLATLET. 


COM.  STEEL  SHELL    A?j  LB5.  . 


;:    ^=^=  t £Jtf>.r£ifZE//y/3IL1CE/53e>C<.'./H    \\ 


17 

powder,  or  that  an  auxiliary  charge  of  such  powder  be  placed  at  the 
rear  of  the  cartridge  case  to  communicate  the  flame  from  the  per- 
cussion primer  and  thoroughly  ignite  the  smokeless  powder.  The 
percussion  primer,  known  as  the  "110-gfain  percussion  primer," 
contains  an  igniting  charge  of  95  grains  of  black  powder  in  addition 
to  the  essential  elements  of  a  percussion  primer. 

The  U110-grain  percussion  primer"  is  shown  in  Plate  IV,  and  con- 
sists of  a  brass  case  resembling  in  shape  a  small-arms  cartridge  case. 
The  head  or  rear  end  of  the  primer  case  is  countersunk,  forming  a 
cup-shaped  recess,  in  which  is  seated  the  cap  or  percussion  primer 
proper.  The  latter  consists  of  the  cup,  the  anvil,  and  the  percussion 
composition,  assembled  as  shown  on  Plate  IV.  The  percussion  com- 
position is  known  as  the  "H-42"  mixture,  and  contains  the  following 
ingredients : 

Per  cent. 

Chlorate  of  potash 47.  206 

Tersulphide  of  antimony 30.  829 

Flowers  of  sulphur 21.  965 

The  percussion-cap  recess  is  connected  with  the  interior  of  the 
primer  case  by  a  small  vent.  The  body  of  the  case  contains  95 
grains  of  black  powder,  constituting  the  rear  " priming"  or  igniting 
charge  for  the  smokeless  powder.  This  black  powder  is  inserted 
under  a  pressure  of  30,000  pounds  per  square  inch,  and  is  pressed 
into  the  primer  body  around  a  central  wire,  which  is  then  withdrawn, 
leaving  a  longitudinal  hole  the  full  length  of  the  primer.  Eight 
radial  holes  are  drilled  through  the  primer  and  compressed  powder, 
affording  16  vents  for  the  free  exit  of  the  black-powder  flames.  After 
filling  the  case  the  front  end  is  closed  by  two  cardboard  wads,  the 
end  being  crimped  over  the  wads  and  the  inside  of  the  mouth  covered 
with  shellac.  The  radial  perforations  in  the  body  of  the  case  are 
covered  by  a  tin-foil  wrapper  *to  retain  in  the  case  any  loose  black 
powder,  as  well  as  to  exclude  all  moisture. 

In  action  the  blow  of  the  firing  pin  explodes  the  percussion  cap, 
which  ignites  the  black  powder;  the  flames  of  the  latter  shoot  out 
through  the  vents  in  the  primer  case  and  ignite  the  smokeless-powder 
charge. 

The  primer  just  described  is  known  as  the  "110-grain  percussion 
primer,"  and  is  used  only  with  smokeless-powder  charges.  A  shorter 
primer,  known  as  the  "  saluting  primer  percussion,"  is  issued  by  the 
Ordnance  Department  for  use  in  blank  cartridges.  The  percussion 
elements  and  the  dimensions  of  the  seat  in  the  cartridge  case  for  both 
types  of  primers  are  identical.  The  primer  charge  of  the  saluting 
primer  consists  of  20  grains  of  loose  rifle  powder,  held  in  place  by 
a  paper  wad  shellacked  in  the  mouth  of  the  primer  case.  The  "20- 
grain  saluting  primers"  are  issued  in  hermetically  sealed  tin  boxes, 
61714—16 2 


18 

25  in  a  box.     Th.3  boxes  should  not  b3  opened  nor  the  cases  prim  ( d 
until  shortly  before  they  are  required  for  use. 

The  small  primer-inserting  press   is   provided  for  inserting  bo\. 
types  of  primers,  which  must  be  carefully  pressed,  and  not  hammered, 
into  their  seats  in  the  cartridge  cases.     Special  deCapping  tools  are 
also  issued  for  removing  old  primer  cases  from  cartridge  cases  with- 
out injury  to  the  latter. 

THE    POWDER    CHARGE. 

The  powder  is  a  nitrocellulose  powder  composed  of  single  perforated 
cylindrical  grains.  In  making  up  the  cartridges,  a  brass  diaphragm 
is  placed  in  the  mouth  of  the  case  on  top  of  the  powder  charge  and 
soldered  fast,  thus  holding  the  powder  charge,  in  the  rear  position 
of  the  cartridge  case  in  contact  with  the  primer. 

Smokeless  powder  must  not  be  used  for  blank  charges,  For  that 
purpose  the  Ordnance  Department  furnishes  special  powder  for 
saluting  purposes. 

THE    PROJECTILES. 

The  projectiles  used  in  this  gun  are  the  12J  and  18  pound  cast-iron 
shell,  12^-pound  steel  shell,  and  the  12^-pound  shrapnel. 

The  12J-pound  steel  shell  is  10.2  inches  long.  It  has  a  capacity  of 
15.56  cubic  inches,  with  fuze  in  place.  It  contains  a  bursting  charge 
of  0.756  pound  of  T.  N.  T. 

The  medium-caliber  base  detonating  fuze  is  used  in  this  shell. 

The  12^-pound  cast-iron  shell  (PI.  TV)  is  10.18  inches  long,  weighs 
12 J  pounds  loaded  and  fuzed,  has  a  capacity  of  14.47  cubic  inches,  a 
bursting  charge  of  6.88  ounces  of  black  powder,  and  is  provided  with 
a  base  percussion  fuze,  medium  and  major  caliber. 

The  18-pound  cast-iron  shell  (PL  IV)  is  14.34  inches  long,  weighs 
18  pounds  loaded  and  fuzed,  has  a  capacity  of  20.69  cubic  inches,  a 
bursting  charge  of  9.92  ounces  of  black  powder,  and  is  provided  with 
a  base  percussion  fuze.  Medium  and  major  caliber  shell  of  future 
manufacture  will  be  of  steel,  loaded  with  high  explosive  and  fuzed 
with  detonating  fuzes. 

The  manufacture  of  18-pound  projectiles  has  been  discontinued. 

COMMON    SHRAPNEL. 

The  common  shrapnel  (PL  IV)  is  a  base-charged  shrapnel  fitted 
witli  the  21-second  combination  fuze.  The  case  is  of  steel  with  solid 
base.  The  rotating  band  is  forced  into  an  annular  groove  cut  in  the 
case  1.2  inches  from  the  base.  The  front  or  mouth  of  the  case  is 
closed  by  a  steel  head,  screwed  in  and  tapped  to  take  the  service  com- 
bination time  and  percussion  fuze.  The  bursting  charge  is  composed 


19 


of  loose  black  powder,  covered  by  a  steel  diaphragm.  The  diaphragm 
supports  a  brass  central  tube  which  extends  forward  to  the  fuze, 
and  thus  affords  a  conduit  for  the  flames  from  the  fuze  to  the  bursting 
charge.  At  the  lower  end  of  the  central  tube  a  stopper  of  dry  gun- 
cotton  is  fitted  to  prevent  the  loose  powder  charge  from  getting  into 
the  tube  and  also  to  help  ignite  the  bursting  charge.  The  shrapnel 
filling  is  composed  of  212  balls,  each  approximately  167  grains  in 
weight.  They  are  approximately  0.5  inch  in  diameter  and  are  poured 
around  the  central  tube  and  rest  upon  the  steel  diaphragm,  the  inter- 
stices containing  a  smoke-producing  matrix. 

In  action  the  case  is  not  ruptured  upon  the  explosion  of  the  burst- 
ing charge;  the  head  is  stripped  and  the  balls  are  shot  out  of  the  case 
with  an  increasa  of  velocity  from  250  to  300  feet  per  second. 

FRAXKFORD    ARSENAL    COMBINATION    FUZE,  MODEL   OF    1907    M. 

This  fuze  consists  of  the  following  parts: 


•a  Body,  bronze. 

of  Stop  pin,  brass. 

b  Closing  cap,  brass. 

b'  Vents  in  closing  cap. 

c  Upper  time-train  ring,  Tobin  bronze. 

c'  Washer  for  time-train  ring,  graduated, 

felt  cloth. 
d  Time-train    ring,     graduated,     Tobin 

bronze. 

d'  Washer  for  body,  felt  cloth. 
d2  Rotating  pin,  brass. 
e  Concussion  plunger. 
ef  Concusbion-resistance  ring,  brass. 
g  Vent  leading  to  upper  time  train. 
h  Compressed -powder  pellet. 
j,   Upper  time  train,  compressed  powder. 


j  Compressed -powder  pellet,  in  vent 
leading  to  lower  time  train. 

j'  Compressed-powder  pellet  in  lower 
time-train  vent. 

k  Lower  time  train,  compressed  powder. 

I    Brass  disk  locked  in  place. 

m  Compressed -powder  pellet  in  vent  o. 

o  Vent  leading  to  magazine. 

p  Powder  magazine. 

q  Percussion  plunger. 

r   Percussion  primer. 

$  Vents  leading  from  percussion  primer 
to  magazine. 

u  Bottom  closing  screw,  brass. 

v  Washer  for  closing  screw,  muslin. 

w  Washer  for  closing  screw,  brass. 


The  body  a  of  this  fuze  is  machined  from  a  bronze  forging.  The 
time-train  rings  c  and  d  are  turned  from  hard-rolled  rods  of  Tobin 
bronze.  An  annular  groove  in  the  shape  of  a  horseshoe  is  milled  in 
the  lower  face  of  each  of  the  time-train  rings.  Meal  powder  is  com- 
pressed into  these  grooves  under  a  pressure  of  68,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  forming  a  time  train,  the  total  length  of  which  is  9 
inches. 

The  time  element  of  this  fuze  is  composed  principally  of  the  fol- 
lowing parts :  The  time  or  concussion  plunger  e,  the  concussion-resist- 
ance ring  e' ,  the  firing  pin,  the  vent  g,  leading  to  the  upper  time 
train,  the  compressed-powder  pellet  7i,  the  upper  time  train  i,  the  vent 
j,  the  lower  time  train  ~k,  the  compressed-powder  pellet  m  in  the  vent 
o,  leading  to  the  powder  magazine  p. 


20 

The  plunger  e  is  cylindrical  in  shape  and  contains  the  percussion 
composition  in  a  recess  at  its  base.  The  weight  of  the  plunger  rests 
upon  the  concussion-resistance  ring  er ,  which  keeps  the  primer  from 
contact  with  the  firing  pin.  At  discharge  of  the  gun  the  resistance 
of  the  ring  is  overcome  and  the  primer  is  exploded  by  contact  with 
the  firing  pin. 

As  stated  above,  the  annular  grooves  into  which  the  meal  powder 
of  the  time  train  is  pressed  are  in  the  shape  of  a  horseshoe,  a  solid 
portion  being  left  between  the  ends  of  the  groove  in  each  ring  or 
disk. 

The  upper  time-train  ring  c  is  prevented  from  rotating  by  pins 
which  are  halved  into  the  fuze  body  and  the  inner  circumference  of 
the  ring. 

The  vent  g  is  drilled  through  the  walls  of  the  concussion-plunger 
chamber,  and  is  exactly  opposite  -a  hole  in  the  inner  surface  of  the 
upper  time  train  leading  to  the  end  of  the  train  from  which  the  direc- 
tion of  burning  is  anticlockwise. 

The  hole  j  is  drilled  through  the  upper  face  of  the  lower  time-train 
ring  d  to  the  end  of  the  lower  time-train  groove,  from  which  the 
direction  of  burning  is  clockwise.  The  lower  time-train  ring  is 
movable  and  is  graduated  on  its  outer  edge  in  a  clockwise  direction 
from  0  to  21.2,  each  full  division  corresponding  to  one  second  time  of 
burning  in  flight;  these  divisions  are  subdivided  into  five  equal 
parts  corresponding  to  one-fifth  second.  A  radial  pin  d2  is  provided 
in  the  lower  ring  for  engagement  with  a  notch  in  the  fuze  setter  for 
setting  the.  fuze.  A  line  on  the  lower  flange  of  the  fuze  stock  is  the 
datum  line  for  fuze  settings. 

The  vent  o  is  drilled  through  the  flange  of  the  fuze  stock  to  the 
powder  magazine  p,  and  leads  to  the  same  end  of  the  lower  time  train 
as  the  vent  j — -that  end  from  which  the  direction  of  burning  is  clock- 
wise— when  the  fuze  is  at  its  "zero"  setting. 

The  action  of  the  fuze  as  a  time  fuze  is  as  follows : 

Assuming  the  "zero"  setting,  at  discharge  of  the  gun  the  time 
plunger  arms  and  fires  its  primer.  The  flame  from  the  primer 
passes  out  through  the  vent  g,  igniting  the  pellet  Ji,  the  end  of 
the  upper  time  train  i,  down  through  the  vent  j,  to  the  end  of 
the  lower  time  train  Jc,  and  thence  through  the  vent  o  to  the  mag- 
azine p,  the  flame  from  which  is  transmitted  to  the  base  charge 
in  the  shrapnel.  It  will  be  seen  that  for  the  "zero"  setting  of 
the  fuze  the  origins  of  both  upper  and  lower  time  trains  are  in 
juxtaposition.  Assume  any  other  setting,  say  12  seconds:  The  vent 
j  has  now  changed  its  position  with  respect  to  the  vent  h,  leading 
to  the  beginning  of  the  upper  time  train,  and  the  vent  o,  leading  to 
the  powder  magazine  p,  both  of  which  points  are  fixed  by  the  angle 
subtended  between  the  0  and  the  12-second  settings.  The  flame 


21 

now  passes  out  through  vent  g  and  burns  along  the  upper  time  train 
in  an  anticlockwise  direction  until  the  vent  j  is  reached,  where  it 
passes  down  to  the  beginning  of  the  lower  time  train  and  burns  back 
in  a  clockwise  direction  to  the  position  of  the  vent  o,  whence  it  is 
transmitted  by  the  pellet  of  compressed  powder  m  to  the  powder 
magazine  p. 

For  the  21.2-second  setting  the  vent  /,  leading  to  the  beginning 
of  the  lower  time  train,  is  opposite  the  end  of  the  upper  time  train, 
and  the  end  of  the  lower  time  train  is  opposite  the  vent  o,  leading 
to  the  powder  magazine.  It  will  now  be  seen  that  to  reach  the 
magazine  p  and  burst  the  shrapnel  the  entire  length  of  time  train 
in  both  rings  must  be  burned. 

As  already  stated,  the  annular  grooves  in  the  lower  face  of  each 
ring  for  the  powder  trains  do  not  form  complete  circles,  a  solid  por- 
tion being  left  between  the  ends  of  the  grooves  in  each.  This  solid 
portion  is  utilized  to  obtain  a  setting  at  which  the  fuze  can  not  be 
exploded,  known  as  the  "  safety  point. " 

This  point  is  marked  by  a  line  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  movable 
time  train,  surmounted  by  an  "S"  and  is  located  about  halfway 
between  the  zero  mark  and  the  21.2-second  graduation.  When  this 
point  is  brought  opposite  the  line  on  the  lower  flange  of  the  fuze 
body  the  vent  j  is  covered  by  the  solid  metal  between  the  ends  of  the 
upper  train,  and  the  vent  o,  leading  to  the  powder  magazine  p,  is 
covered  by  the  solid  metal  between  the  ends  of  the  lower  or  movable 
time  train. 

At  the  safety  setting  it  will  be  seen  that  the  upper  train  may  burn 
entirely  out  in  case  of  accidental  firing  of  the  time  plunger,  or  in 
case  it  may  be  desired  to  burst  the  shrapnel  by  impact  or  percussion 
without  the  flame  being  able  to  reach  the  magazine  p. 

The  cloth  washers  c'  and  d*  are  glued  to  the  upper  face  of  the 
graduated  time-train  ring  and  to  the  upper  face  of  the  flange  on  the 
fuze  stock.  These  surfaces  are  corrugated,  as  shown,  to  make  the 
washers  adhere  more  strongly.  The  function  of  the  washers  is  to 
make  a  gas  check  and  prevent  premature  action  of  the  fuzes. 

The  compressed  pellet  j',  in  the  vent  leading  from  the  outside  to 
the  beginning  of  the  lower  time  train,  is  to  release  the  pressure  of  the 
gases  due  to  the  burning  train.  The  gases  from  both  time  trains 
escape  into  the  outer  air  through  the  annular  spaces  shown  in  the 
illustration  and  the  vents  6'  in  the  closing  cap. 

The  percussion  element  of  this  fuze  as  shown  in  the  plate  consists 
of  a  percussion  plunger  q  and  an  ordinary  percussion  primer  r. 

The  system  of  vents  s  through  the  walls  of  the  fuze  shown  in  figure  1 
conduct  the  flame  from  the  percussion  primer  to  the  magazine  p. 

The  bottom  closing  screw  closes  the  percussion-plunger  recess  and 
keeps  the  powder  in  the  magazine.  The  muslin  washer  v  is  coated 


22 


with  shellac  and  held  in  place  by  the  brass  washer  w,  over  the  outer 
edge  of  which  a  projecting  lip  is  crimped. 

These  fuzes  are  issued  assembled  in  shrapnel.  For  transportation 
the  fuzes  should  always  be  set  at  the  safety  point. 

The  fuze  is  provided  with  a  waterproof  hood  of  thin  brass,  her- 
metically sealed.  The  hood  should  be  stripped  off  before  an  attempt 
is  made  to  set  the  fuze. 

FRANKFORD    ARSENAL    COMBINATION    FUZE,  MODEL    OF    1915. 

[Plate  V.] 

The  fuze  consists  of  the  following  parts,  assembled  as  shown  in  the 
drawing : 


a  Body,  steel. 
of  Stop  pin,  brass. 

6  Closing  cap,  steel. 
67  Vents  in  closing  cap. 

c  Upper  time  train  ring,  Tobin  bronze. 
cf  Washer  for  time  train  ring,  graduated, 
felt  cloth. 

d  Time    train    ring   graduated,    Tobin 

bronze. 

d'  Washer  for  body,  felt  cloth. 
d2  Rotating  pin,  brass. 

e  Concussion  plunger. 
e/  Concussion  resistance  ring,  brass. 

/  Concussion  firing  pin,  brass. 
/'  Safety  pellet,  compressed  powder. 
f2  Safety  cap,  brass. 

g  Vent  leading  to  upper  time  train. 

h  Compressed  powder  pellet. 

i  Upper  time  train  ring,    compressed 
powder. 


j  Compressed   powder  pellet  in   vent 

leading  to  lower  time  train. 
y  Compressed  powder  pellet  in  lower 
time-train  vent. 

k  Lower  time  train  compressed  powder. 

I  Brass  disk,  locked  in  place. 
m  Compressed  powder  pellet  in  vent  o. 

o  Vent  leading  to  magazine. 
p  Powder  magazine. 

q  Percussion  plunger,  brass. 
q/  Percussion  plunger  sleeve,  brass. 
q~  Restraining  spring,  brass. 

r  Percussion  primer. 

s  Vent  leading  from  percussion  primer 
to  magazine. 

t  Percussion  firing  pin,  German  silver. 
u  Bottom  closing  screw,  brass. 

v  Washer  for  closing  screw,  muslin. 
w  Washer  for  closing  screw,  brass. 
w/  Bottom  closing  screw  disk,  paper. 


The  time  element  of  this  fuze  is  exactly  like  that  of  the  model  of 
1907  M,  the  time-train  rings  and  concussion  plunger  being  the  same 
and  the  closing  cap  the  same,  with  the  exception  that  it  is  made  of 
steel  for  the  model  of  1915,  where  in  the  model  of  1907  M  it  is  made  of 
brass. 

The  action  of  the  fuze  as  a  time  fuze  is  exactly  like  the  model  of 
1907  M,  described  previously. 

The  action  of  the  fuze  as  a  percussion  fuze  is  as  follows : 

When  the  gun  is  fired,  and  the  concussion  or  time  plunger  e  fires  its 
primer,  the  flame  besides  passing  through  the  vent  g  and  igniting 
the  upper  time  train,  also  passes  through  the  four  holes  in  the  con- 
cussion firing  pin /and  ignites  the  safety  pellet/7.  When  this  burns 
out  completely,  the  percussion  plunger  q  is  free  to  move  forward  in  its 
sleeve  q',  carrying  the  percussion  primer  r  with  it. 


PL  ATE 'Y 


21  SECOND    COMBINATION    FUZE-MODEL  OF IQI5. 
F/Q.  1  FIG.  £. 


* 

/ 


BASE  PCRCU5SION  FUZE.     MfO/UM  A  HO    MAJOR  C/tLIBfK. 


36-23-33 


23 

The  restraining  spring  q2  prevents  the  percussion  plunger  from 
creeping  forward  during  the  flight  of  the  projectile  and  on  impact 
the  plunger  flies  forward,  overcoming  the  resistance  of  the  spring 
and  the  primer  is  exploded  by  the  firing  pin  t.  The  flame  passes 
through  the  vent  s  to  the  powder  magazine  p.  The  paper  disk  wf 
keeps  the  powder  in  the  magazine  from  entering  the  percussion 
plunger  cavity. 

BASE    PERCUSSION    FUZE,  MEDIUM    AND   MAJOR    CALIBER. 

[Plate  V.] 

The  fuze  consists  of  the  following  parts  assembled  as  shown  in  the 
drawing: 

a  Body,  brass.  j  Plunger  brass. 

6  Closing  cap  screw,  brass.  k  Plunger  housing,  brass. 


c  Primer  shield,  brass. 
d  Primer  body,  brass. 
e  Primer  disk,  paper. 


I  Firing  pin,  brass. 
m  Firing -pin  fulcrum,  steel. 
n  Safety  pin,  brass. 


/  Primer  closing  screw,  brass.  o  Safety-pin  spring,  brass. 


g  Reinforcing    charge,    loose   shrapnel 
powder. 


p  Restraining  spring,  brass. 

q  Restraining-spring  housing,  brass. 


h  End  closing  disk,  brass. 

The  plunger  /  is  provided  with  a  slot  to  receive  the  firing  pin  I, 
which  is  mounted  on  the  fulcrum  m  and  kept  in  the  unarmed  position, 
figure  1,  by  two  safety  pins  n,  in  recesses  on  opposite  sides  of  the 
plunger  and  held  in  the  hole  in  the  firing  pin  by  the  tension  of  the 
springs  o.  These  springs  are  designed  to  suit  the  velocity  of  rotation 
of  the  particular  projectile  in  which  the  fuze  is  used.  The  centrifugal 
force  due  to  the  rotation  of  the  projectile  forces  the  pins  outward 
against  tho  tension  of  the  springs  and  releases  the  firing  pin,  which 
is  rotated  by  the  same  centrifugal  force  into  its  armed  position, 
figure  2.  The  entire  plunger  and  housing  is  held  to  the  rear  by  two 
springs  p,  pressing  on  the  closing  screw . through  the  housing  q. 

MARKING    ON    AMMUNITION    PACKING    BOXES. 

Both  ends  and  sides  of  the  box  are  marked  with  conspicuous 
characters  to  facilitate  the  rapid  identification  of  tho  ammunition 
contained  therein.  The  conspicuous  marking  consists  of  the  follow- 
ing symbols: 

42.95G 

The  ordnance  escutcheon  is  always  in  red  for  mobile  artillery 
ammunition.  The  numerals  2.95  refer  to  the  caliber  and  the  letter 
G  to  the  gun.  The  numerals  2.95  and  the  letter  G  are  in  yellow  for 
common  shrapnel,  black  for  common  steel  shell,  and  blue  for  blank 
ammunition. 


24 

In  addition  to  the  conspicuous  marking,  the  quantity  and  type  of 
ammunition  are  indicated  without  symbols  by  the  marking  "4  fixed 
common  shrapnel,"  etc.,  so  that  in  case  one  is  not  familiar  with  the 
conspicuous  marking  system  he  can  immediately  ascertain  the  key 
by  this  additional  marking. 

Also  on  both  ends  and  sides  of  the  box  the  "Lot"  followed  by  a 
number  appears.  This  refers  to  the  ammunition  lot,  and  in  case  of 
any  trouble  arising  with  regard  to  the  functioning  of  the  ammunition, 
this  lot  number  should  be  quoted  in  the  report. 

On  the  sides  of  the  box  in  addition  to  the  marking  described  is 
found  a  pictorial  stenciled  symbol  indicating  the  type  of  projectile 
and  the  fact  that  the  ammunition  is  fixed. 

When  shot  is  packed  the  conspicuous  marking  is  as  follows : 


I2.95Z3 


The  entire  marking  in  this  case  is  black.  The  numerals  2.95  refer 
to  the  caliber,  the  letter  "Z,"  zone,  and  the  numerals  1,  2;  or  3  follow- 
ing the  "Z,"  the  fact  that  one  zone,  two  zones,  or  three  zones  are  used. 

On  the  top  of  the  box  near  one  end  is  starTTped  a  general  description 
of  the  contents,  as  "Ammunition  for  cannon  with  explosive  projec- 
tile/' when  the  projectiles  are  of  the  explosive  typo,  as  sholl  or  shrap- 
nel: "Ammunition  for  cannon  with  empty 'projectiles/7  for  shot;  and 
"Ammunition  for  cannon  without  projectiles/'  for  blank  ammunition. 
To  one  side  of  this  stamping  appears  the  saal  of  the  post  where  packed 
and  the  inspector's  stamp. 

BLANK   AMMUNITION. 

Blank  metallic  ammunition  is  for  use  in  salute  firing,  morning  and 
evening  gun  firing,  maneuver  firing,  etc.,  and  consists  of  the  follow- 
ing components :  A  brass  cartridge  case,  a  percussion  primer,  a  charge 
of  black  powder,  cloth  powder  bags,  and  a  tight-fitting  felt  wad. 

The  powder  charge  is  contained  in  a  cloth  bag,  which  is  placed  in 
the  case  after  the  primer  is  inserted  and  then  the  wad  is  inserted  and 
sealed.  This  is  to  prevent  any  powder  from  leaking  out  in  the 
event  of  the  dislodgement  of  the  wad,  due  to  rough  handling  in  trans- 
portation or  jolting  in  the  caissons  and  limbers. 

THE    CARTRIDGE    CASE. 

The  cartridge  case  for  blank  ammunition  is  identical  with  the 
service  cartridge  case.  Cartridge  cases  are  issued  unprimed,  and 
primers  should  not  be  inserted  until  the  ammunition  is  to  be  prepared 
for  use. 

Cartridge  oases  that  have  become  deformed  in  service  should  be 
turned  in  to  the  posts  or  arsenals  designated  in  current  orders  for 
resizing  and  re-forming. 


THE    PRIMER. 


The  saluting  primer  (percussion)  is  used  in  the  preparation  of 
blank  metallic  ammunition.  The  primer  should  be  a  tight  fit  in  the 
primer  seat  in  the  cartridge  case,  and  must  be  pressed  into  place 
with  the  primer-inserting  press  provided  for  the  purpose,  and  not 
hammered  in.  No  primer  should  be  used  that  is  not  a  tight  fit  in  its 
scat  in  the  case. 

Cartridge  cases  should  be  primed  just  before  the  insertion  of  the 
powder  charge,  and  under  no  circumstances  will  primers  be  inserted 
after  the  powder  charge  has  been  inserted. 

Primers  are  issued  in  hermetically  sealed  tin  boxes,  which  should 
not  be  broken  open  until  the  primers  are  to  be  used,  as  they  deteriorate 
when  exposed  to  atmospheric  influences. 


THE    CHARGE. 


The  charge  to  be  used  in  the  preparation  of  blank  metallic  ammu- 
nition for  the  2.95-inch  mountain  gun  is  1  pound  2  ounces  of  saluting 
powder. 

PREPARATION    OF    BLANK    METALLIC   AMMUNITION. 

Blank  metallic  ammunition  will  be  assembled  at  posts  or  in  the 
field  under  the  personal  supervision  of  a  commissioned  officer,  who 
will  be  held-  responsible  that  it  is  prepared  in  the  manner  prescribed 
in  orders. 

For  this  purpose  there  are  issued  blank-cartridge  cases,  black  pow- 
der in  bulk,  cloth  powder  bags,  tight-fitting  felt  wads,  rubberine 
or  other  quick-drying  paint,  prmiers,  etc. 

When  saluting  powder  is  issued  in  bulk  for  use  in  blank  cartridges, 
the  bags  should  be  requisitioned  for  separately  and  should  be  sepa- 
rately invoiced. 

Before  assembling,  the  cartridge  cases  should  be  carefully  inspected 
to  see  that  they  are  in  sound  condition  and  thoroughly  clean  and  dry. 
They  should  also  be  tested  by  trying  them  in  the  gun,  to  determine 
whether  they  have  become  deformed.  Any  cases  that  do  not  readily 
enter  the  chamber  in  the  gun  or  that  are  otherwise  seriously  deformed 
should  be  laid  aside  for  resizing.  After  inspecting  the  cartridge  cases 
the  blank  ammunition  should  be  prepared  as  follows: 

(a)  Insert  the  primers  with  the  primer-inserting  press. 

(&)  Pour  the  proper  weight  of  powder  into  the  cloth  bag  and  tie 
up  the  mouth  of  the  bag  with  string.  Before  inserting  in  the  case, 
see  that  the  opening  in  the  bottom  of  the  bag  is  free  to  allow  it  to 
settle  around  the  primer. 

In  tying  the  bag,  use  no  more  string  and  leave  no  more  cloth  in 
the  "choke"  than  necessary  and  place  the  bag  in  the  case  with  the 
"choke"  end  toward  the  mouth  of  the  case. 


26 

(c)  Insert  the  felt  wad  and  press  it  .down  hard  until  it  rests  squarely 
on  the  powder  charge. 

(d)  Give  the  upper  surface  of  the  felt  wad  and  the  inside  of  the 
cartridge  case  just  above  the  wad  a  good  coat  of  the  rubberine  or 
other  quick-drying  paint  furnished  for  the  purpose,  using  a  brush, 
and  allow  the  case  to  stand  until  this  coat  is   dry.     Then  apply 
another  coat  of  rubberine  paint  in  a  similar  manner.     The  object  of 
using  rubberine  paint,  which  is  strongly  adhesive,  is  to  thoroughly 
seal  the  joint  between  the  wad  and  the  case  and  at  the  same  time  to 
firmly  hold  the  wad  in  place. 


PRECAUTIONS  TO  BE  OBSERVED. 


Firings  with  blank  metallic  ammunition  will  be  greatly  facilitated 
by  a  careful  observance  of  the  following: 

Before  all  firings  a  careful  examination  should  be  made  of  the 
assembled  rounds  to  see  that  the  felt  wads  have  not  become  displaced 
or  the  cartridge  cases  dented  or  deformed  by  careless  handling.  If 
the  cartridge  cases  have  been  properly  resized  and  are  clean,  no  diffi- 
culty should  be  experienced  in  inserting  them  in  the  gun,  provided 
the  chamber  of  the  latter  is  clean.  The  continued  insertion  of  car- 
tridge cases  that  are  hot  clean  causes  an  accumulation  in  the  gun 
chamber  which  may  make  the  insertion  of  subsequent  rounds  difficult 
or  impossible. 

In  firing  blank  ammunition  the  gun  chamber  will  -be  sponged  after 
each  round  with  a  damp  sponge,  to  extinguish  sparks  and  remove 
powder  residue  resulting  from  the  previous  round,  before  the  inser- 
tion of  another  round. 

Care  will  be  taken  to  see  that  the  sponges  are  not  worn  and  that 
they  thoroughly  fit  the  chamber.  The  interval  between  rounds  in 
firing  blank  ammunition  should  be  sufficient  to  allow  thorough  spong- 
ing of  the  chamber  and  examination  to  ascertain  that  all  sparks  have 
been  extinguished. 

Wads  for  the  preparation  of  blank  metallic  ammunition  are  made 
to  tightly  fit  in  the  cartridge  case.  No  wads  should  be  used  that  are 
not  a  tight  fit  in  the  case 


CARE    OF    CARTRIDGE  CASES. 


As  soon  after  firing  as  practicable  the  exploded  primers  should  be 
removed  from  the  cartridge  case  by  means  of  the  decapping  tool 
furnished  with  the  reloading  outfit.  The  case  should  then  be  thor- 
oughly washed  in  a  strong  solution  of  soft  soap  and  soda  to  remove 
all  powder  residue.  It  should  then  be  thoroughly  dried. 

Before  firing  a  salute  with  blank  metallic  ammunition  all  the 
cartridges  to  be  used  should  be  inserted  in  the  gun  to  ascertain  if  they 
will  fit.  In  preparing  ammunition  for  salutes,  a  few  rounds  in  addi- 


tion  to  the  required  number  should  be  prepared  for  use  in  case  of 
misfires.  Lightly  oiling  the  outside  of  cartridge  cases  just  before  use 
will  facilitate  their  insertion  and  extraction. 

If  the  cartridge  cases  are  carefully  cleaned  and  washed  immediately 
after  firing,  not  only  will  less  labor  be  required,  but  the  life  of  the 
cartridge  case  will  be  greatly  prolonged. 

A  good  solution  for  washing  cartridge  cases  may  be  prepared  by 
using  ingredients  in  the  following  proportions:  1  gallon  of  water, 
2^  ounces  soft  soap,  5J  ounces  soda.  The  mixture  should  be  boiled 
and  stirred  until  the  ingredients  are  entirely  dissolved. 

In  washing  cartridge  cases  this  solution  should  be  used  hot  and  in 
sufficient  quantity  to  completely  immerse  the  cases. 

Neither  acids  nor  solutions  of  acids  will  be  used  for  cleaning  car- 
tridge cases. 

THE    B.ELOADING  AND   CLEANING   OUTFIT. 

This  outfit  consists  of  the  following  parts,  and  is  furnished  to 
each  battery  and  to  each  post  where  saluting  is  necessary: 

Primer-inserting  press,  small/ 

Bushing. 

Powder  measure,  saluting 

Decapping  tool,  with  guide. 


Cleaning  brush. 


Glass  V,  Section  5. 


Hammer,  bronze. 
Case  holder. 
Case-holder  stand. 
Storage  chest. 

The  bushing  is  used  in  the  primer-inserting  press  for  the  insertion 
of  new  primers. 

The  decapping  tool  and  case  holder  and  stand  are  used  for  remov- 
ing exploded  primers  from  the  cartridge  cases.  A  light  blow  on  the 
rod  with  a  piece  of  wood  or  the  bronze  hammer  generally  removes 
the  primer. 

A  powder  measure  to  suit  the  saluting  charge  for  the  gun  is  fur- 
nished, and  when  level  full  holds  the  required  charge. 

The  cleaning  brush  is  furnished  for  cleaning  the  cartridge  cases 
after  they  have  been  used  and  should  be  ordered  to  suit  the  size  of 
case  for  which  intended. 


MISFIRES   AND    HANGFIRES. 


" Misfires"  and  "hangfires"  are  of  exceedingly  rare  occurrence  with 
this  ammunition.  In  case  of  the  failure  of  the  cartridge  to  fire  when 
the  trigger  is  pulled,  the  breechblock  should  not  be  opened  until  after 
the  expiration  of  at  least  one  minute.  The  gun  may  be  immediately 
recocked  without  opening  the  breech  mechanism  and  the  cartridge 
tried  again.  Defective  cartridges  and  primers  should  be  reported. 


28 

THE    HAND    FUZE    SETTER,   MODEL    OF    1905    M. 
[Plate  VI.] 

The  fuze  setter  is  a  device  for  rapid  and  accurate  setting  the  fuze 
for  various  ranges  and  heights  of  burst.  Two  hand  fuze  setters  in 
leather  cases  are  issued  for  each  gun. 

The  names  of  the  parts  of  the  hand  fuze  setter  and  the  manner  in 
which  they  are  assembled  are  shown  in  plate. 

While  the  rate  of  burning  of  different  fuzes  of  the  same  lot  will  be 
found  uniform,  it  may  vary  slightly  from  that  upon  which  the  fuze 
setter  range-ring  scale  is  based.  The  amount  of  this  variation  at 
different  ranges  must  be  determined  by  trial  and  allowed  for.  This 
allowance,  with  correction  for  error  in  determining  angle  of  site,  etc., 
and  regulation  of  height  of  burst  of  shrapnel,  is  made  on  the  cor- 
rector scale.  In  use  the  battery  commander  indicates  the  corrector 
reading  desired.  Should  the  height  of  burst  of  the  shrapnel  not  be  that 
desired,  it  is  increased  or  diminished  by  increasing  or  decreasing  the 
corrector-scale  reading  on  the  fuze  setter.  When  the  height  of  burst 
has  been  adjusted  for  one  range,  the  range  may  be  increased  or 
diminished  in  order  to  sweep  the  ground  in  depth  without  altering 
the  corrector. 

A  new  design  of  corrector  scale  with  sliding  index  has  been  adopted 
and  will  be  issued  to  replace  all  of  the  old  design.  In  use,  the  range 
and  corrector  setting  having  been  ordered,  the  sliding  index  is  set  at 
the  designated  corrector  setting  and  the  graduation  line  corresponding 
to  the  range  is  set  opposite  the  fiducial  edge  of  the  index.  This  will 
require  that  whenever  the  corrector  or  range  is  changed  the  fuze 
setter  must  be  undamped  and  a  new  setting  made. 

To  use  the  hand  fuze  setter,  loosen  the  clamp  screw,  set  the  range 
ring  at  the  range  and  correction  ordered,  and  clamp;  remove  the 
waterproof  cover  of  the  fuze;  place  the  fuze  setter  over  the  point  of 
the  projectile  and  turn  in  a  clockwise  direction  until  the  rotating  pin 
of  the  fuze  engages  in  the  notch  provided  for  it;  then  press  firmly 
down  on  the  fuze  setter  and  continue  to  turn  in  a  clockwise  direction 
until  the  stop  pin  in  the  fuze  setter  engages  with  the  fixed  stop  pin 
in  fuze  body  and  prevents  further  rotation.  Especial  care  must  be 
taken  to  rotate  the  fuze  setter  in  a  clockwise  direction. 

The  hand  fuze  setter  should  be  disassembled  from  time  to  time 
and  thoroughly  cleaned  and  oiled.  To  disassemble:  Remove  the 
corrector-scale  mechanism,  unscrew  the  clamp  screw,  remove  the 
clamp  shoe;  remove  plug;  unscrew  the  base  from  the  case;  with- 
draw tne  range-ring  carrier,  with  range  ring  and  handle,  from  the 
case.  Clean  thoroughly,  oil,  and  assemble  in  reverse  order. 


29 


For  setting  the  15-second  combination  fuze,  a  number  of  which 
are  still  in  the  service,  a  suitable  punch  is  provided.  With  this  punch 
a  hole  is  made  through  the  cover,  time  train,  and  lead  cone  of  the 
fuze  at  the  point  corresponding  to  the  number  of  seconds  desired. 

Range  table  for  2.95-inch  mountain  gun. 

PROJECTILE,  12£  POUNDS.     MUZZLE  VELOCITY,  920  FEET  PER  SECOND. 


! 

i 

"3 

*o  .0 

05  ^3 

•£>> 
a 

< 

<ts 
-H.§ 

ntS 

3  > 

03 

ijTS 

s 

>: 
*' 

X*" 

<1 

•c? 

Sa 

*P, 

as 

x2 
<] 

A/x  for  change  i 
of  ±toC. 

Timeoffligllt. 

*• 

Q 

Deflection  for 
cross  \vind, 
10m.  p.  h. 

4 
vti 

|I 

1 

0 

1 

*53 

Terminal  ve- 
locity. 

Maximum  or- 
dinate. 

Values  of  "(V 

Values  of  ^ 

Yds. 

0               , 

Yds. 

Yds. 

Yds. 

Yds. 

Sees. 

Mils. 

Mils. 

0              , 

I  on— 

f.s. 

Feet. 

100 

13 

5.0 

2.2 

0 

0.1 

0.3 

0.02 

0.05 

20 

144.5 

914 

1 

200 

33 

5.0 

4.4 

0 

.2 

.6 

.05 

.10 

40 

76.4 

908 

2 

300 

53 

5.0 

6.6 

.1 

.3 

.9 

.09 

.15 

1     00 

51.3 

902 

4 

400 

1    13 

5.0 

8.7 

.2 

.5 

1.2 

.14 

.21 

1    20 

38.2 

896 

7 

500 

1    33 

5.0 

10.8 

.3 

.8 

1.6 

.2 

.27 

1    40 

30.4 

890 

11 

600 

1    53 

4.9 

12.9 

.4 

1.1 

1.9 

.3 

.32 

2    00 

25.3 

884 

16 

700 

2    14 

4.8 

14.9 

.5 

1.5 

2.3 

.4 

.38 

2    21 

21.6 

878 

22 

800 

2    35 

4.7 

16.9 

.  7 

1.9 

2.6 

.4 

.44 

2    42 

18.8 

871 

28 

900 

2    57 

4.6 

18.8 

.9 

2.4 

3.0 

.5 

.50 

3      4 

16.5 

865 

36 

1,000 

3     19 

4.5 

20.7 

1.1 

3.0 

3.4 

.6 

.56 

3    26 

14.6 

859 

46 

2.328 

0.617 

100 

3    41 

.4 

22.5 

1.3 

3.8 

3.7 

.7 

.63 

3    48 

13.2 

852 

57 

200 

4       4 

.3 

24.3 

1.5 

4.7 

4.0 

.9 

.70 

4    11 

12.0 

845 

68 

300 

4    27 

.:; 

26.0 

1.  8 

5.8 

4.4 

1.0 

.77 

4    34 

11.0 

838 

80 

400 

4    51 

.2 

27.7 

2.2 

7.0 

4.8 

1.2 

.85 

4    58 

10.  t 

831 

94 

500 

5    15 

.2 

29.3 

2.7 

8.4 

5.2 

1.3 

.93 

5    22 

9.4 

824 

109 

600 

5    39 

4.2 

30.9 

3.3 

9.9 

5.5 

1.5 

1.02 

5    46 

8.7 

816 

125 

700 

6      3 

4.1 

32.4 

4.0 

11.6 

5.9 

1.6 

1.11 

6    10 

8.1 

809 

142 

800 

6    27 

4.1 

33.9 

4.8 

13.5 

6.3 

1.8 

1.20 

6    34 

7.6 

802 

161 

900 

6    52 

4.0 

35.4 

5.8 

15.6 

6.7 

2.1 

1.30 

6    59 

7.1 

794 

182 

2,000 

7    17 

3.9 

36.8 

6.9 

17.9 

7.1 

2.3 

1.41 

7    24 

6.7 

786 

205 

1.877 

.765 

100 

7    43 

3.8 

38.2 

8.1 

20.4 

7.5 

2.  6 

1.52 

7    50 

6.3 

778 

229 

200 

8    10 

3.7 

39.6 

9.5 

23.0 

7.9 

2.9 

1.63 

8    17 

6.0 

770 

254 

300 

8    38 

3.6 

40.  9 

11.0 

25.7 

8.3 

3.2 

1.75 

8    4o 

5.7 

762 

281 

400 

9      6 

3.5 

42.2 

12.6 

28.5 

8.8 

3.5 

1.88 

9    13 

5.4 

754 

310 

500 

9    35 

:*.  t 

43.5 

14.3 

31.4 

9.2 

3.9 

2.01 

9    42 

5.1 

746 

342 

600 

10      5 

3.3 

44.7 

16.1 

34.4 

9.6 

4.3 

2.14 

10    12 

4.8 

'738 

376 

700 

10    36 

3.2 

45.9 

18.0 

37.5 

10.1 

4.7 

2.28 

10    43 

4.5 

729 

413 

800 

11      8 

3.1 

47.1 

20.0 

40.7 

10.  G 

5.1 

2.42 

11     15 

4.3 

721 

452 

900 

11    41 

3.0 

48.2 

22.0 

44.0 

11.0 

5.6 

2.56 

11    48 

4.0 

713 

494 

3,000 

12    15 

2.9 

49.3 

24.1 

47.5 

11.5 

6.1 

2.70 

12    22 

3.8 

705 

539 

1.587 

.905 

100 

12    50 

2.8 

50.4 

26.2 

51.1 

12:0 

6.6 

2.84 

12    57 

3.6 

696 

587 

200 

13    26 

2.7 

51.5 

28.8 

54.8 

12.5 

7.1 

2.98 

13    33 

3.4 

688 

638 

300 

14      3 

2.7 

52.6 

31.1 

58.6 

13.0 

7.7 

3.12 

14     10 

3.2 

680 

692 

400 

14    41 

2.<> 

53.7 

33.5 

62.5 

13.5 

8.3 

3.26 

14    48 

3.0 

672 

749 

500 

15    20 

2.5 

54.7 

36.0 

66.5 

14.0 

8.9 

3.40 

15    27 

2.9 

665 

809 

600 

16    00 

2.  ,', 

55.7 

38.6 

70.6 

14.6 

9.5 

3.54 

16      7 

2.7 

658 

873 

_ 

700 

16    41 

2.4 

56.7 

41.3 

74.8 

15.2 

10.2 

3.68 

16    48 

2.6 

652 

941 

800 

17    23 

2.4 

57.7 

44.2 

79.0 

15.8 

10.9 

3.82 

17    30 

2.5 

646 

1,014 

900 

18      6 

2.3 

58.7 

47.3 

83.3 

16.4 

11.6 

3.96 

18    13 

2.3 

641 

1,093 

4,000 

18    51 

2.2 

59.6 

50.6 

87.6 

17.1 

12.3 

4.11 

18    58 

2.2 

636 

1,179 

1.426 

1.007 

100 

19    38 

2.1 

60.6 

54.1 

91.9 

17.7 

13.1 

4.25 

19    45 

2.1 

632 

1,271 

200 

20    27 

2.0 

61.6 

57.8 

96.3 

18.4 

13.9 

4.40 

20    34 

2.0 

628 

1,369 

300 

21    18 

1.9 

62.6 

61.7 

100.7 

19.0 

14.7 

4.55 

21    25 

1.9 

625 

1,473 

400 

22    10 

1.9 

63.5 

65.8 

105.  1 

19.7 

15.6 

4.70 

22    17 

1.8 

622 

1,583 

500 

23      4 

1.8 

64.5 

70.1 

109.5 

20.4 

16.5 

4.84 

23     11 

.7 

619 

1.699 

600 

24      0 

1.8 

65.4 

74.6 

114.0 

21.1 

17.4 

4.99 

24      7 

.7 

617 

1,821 

700 

21     57 

1.7 

C6.3 

79.2 

118.5 

21.8 

18.3 

5.14 

25      4 

.6 

615 

1,948 

800 

25    56 

1.7 

67.2 

83.9 

123.0 

22.5 

19.3 

5.28 

26      3 

.5 

613 

2,280 

900 

26    57 

1.6 

68.1 

88.8 

127.5 

23.  3 

20.3 

5.44 

27      4 

.4 

612 

2,317 

5,000 

27    59 

1.6 

69.0 

93.9 

132.0 

24.1' 

21.3 

5.58 

28      6 

.3 

611 

2,360 

1.421 

1.010 

30 

HAND   FUZE    SETTER,    MODEL    OF    1912. 
[Plate  VI.] 

The  hand  fuze  setter  is  provided  for  the  same  purpose  as  the  hand 
fuze  setter,  model  of  1905  M.  Plate  VI  shows  assembled  and  sectional 
views  and  designation  of  parts.  The  principal  parts  are  the  case,  the 
range-index  mechanism,  range  mechanism,  correction  mechanism,  and 
guide  plate. 

The  case  forms  a  housing  for  the  movable  parts  and  provides  seats 
for  the  worm  cases  and  the  index  bar.  The  slot  cut  in  the  top  of  the 
case  limits  the  movement  of  the  projecting  segment  of  the  corrector- 
scale  support,  which  carries  the  corrector  scale.  The  serrated  rim 
forms  a  handle  for  turning.  The  arrow  engraved  upon  the  top  and 
the  lower  center  edge  of  the  case  coincides  with  the  graduations  of  the 
corrector  scale.  Two  oil-hole  screws  are  located  in  the  case  directly 
under  the  serrated  rim  on  both  right  and  left  sides  and  identified  by 
the  word  "Oil." 

The  range-index  mechanism  consists  principally  of  the  index  bar, 
range  index,  index  plunger,  and  index  spring.  The  index  bar  is 
retained  in  its  seat,  located  in  the  case  directly  above  the  range  ring 
and  corrector  scale,  by  two  index-bar  screws,  and  forms  a  slide  for  the 
range  index.  The  V-shaped  notches  in  the  index  bar  are  marked 
with  numbers  1,  2,  and  3,  with  the  word  "Zone."  The  range  index 
sliding  upon  the  index  bar  is  held  in  position  by  the  index  spring, 
forcing  the  index  plunger  into  the  V-shaped  notches  of  the  index  bar. 

The  range  mechanism  consists  principally  of  the  range  ring,  range- 
ring  carrier,  worm,  worm  case,  worm-adjusting  screw,  and  worm 
knob. 

The  correction  mechanism  consists  principally  of  the  corrector 
S3ale,  corrector-scale  support,  worm,  worm  case,  worm-adjusting 
screw,  and  worm  knob. 

The  range  ring  is  located  upon  the  range-ring  carrier  by  a  steel 
dowel  pin  and  secured  in  position  by  three  range-ring  screws.  The 
ssale  is  graduated  for  a  range  of  4,900  yards,  least  division  is  50 
yards,  and  numbered  every  500  yards. 

The  data  for  graduating  the  range  ring  is  computed  from  actual 
corrected  firings,  and  then  corrected  for  a  suitable  height  of  burst  of 
3  mils.  The  graduated  surface  is  sandblasted  and  lacquered. 

The  corrector  scale  is  mounted  upon  the  projected  segment  of  the 
corrector-scale  support  and  secured  by  two  corrector-scale  screws. 
On  this  scale  is  graduated  120  equal  divisions,  50  minutes  apart, 
numbered  every  10  divisions.  Graduation  numbered  30  is  the  nor- 
mal or  zero  position,  and  is  indicated  by  an  arrow.  The  word  "  Turn' ' 
and  an  arrow  engraved  upon  the  corrector  scale  indicates  the  direc- 
tion the  fuze  setter  must  be  turned  when  setting  a  fuze.  A  pointer 


31 

is  riveted  and  soldered  to  the  top  of  the  corrector  scale  in  a  certain 
position  to  coincide  with  the  graduated  line  on  the  closing  cap  of  the 
fuze. 

The  range-ring  carrier  is  seated  in  the  corrector-scale  support.  The 
worm  teeth  mesh  with  the  threads  of  the  worm  on  the  right  side  of 
the  fuze  setter.  The  slot,  which  is  cut  in  the  bottom  side  of  the 
range-ring  carrier,  engages  with  the  rotating  pin  in  the  graduated 
time  train  ring  of  the  fuze.  The  interior  is  conical  in  shape,  to  suit 
the  exterior  of  the  fuze. 

The  corrector-scale  support  is  held  within  the  case  by  the  guide 
plate.  The  worm  teeth  mesh  with  the  threads  of  the  worm  on  the 
left  side  of  the  fuze  setter.  The  movement  of  the  corrector-scale 
support  is  limited  in  both  directions  by  the  slot  in  the  case.  The 
stop  pin  is  secured  in  the  interior  of  the  corrector-scale  support  by 
the  stop-pin  screw,  and  engages  with  the  fixed  stop  pin  in  the  body 
of  the  fuze  to  limit  the  movement  of  the  fuze  setter. 

The  worms  are  mounted  eccentrically  in  the  worm  cases,  which, 
when  turned,  provides  an  adjustment  to  take  up  the  wear  between 
the  worm  teeth  of  the  range-ring  carrier  or  corrector-scale  support 
and  the  threads  of  their  respective  worm.  The  worm  cases  have 
screw-driver  slots  at  their  rear  ends,  which  are  provided  for  adjust- 
ing, and  are  locked  in  position  by  the  worm-case  clamp  plugs,  which 
are  secured  by  the  worm-case  clamp  screws.  The  worm-adjusting 
screws  have  fiber  washers  fitted  in  their  ends  that  bear  upon  the 
collars  of  the  worms  for  taking  up  end  motion  and  to  provide  suf- 
ficient friction  to  resist  accidental  turning.  A  screw-driver  slot  is 
located  at  their  front  end  for  adjusting.  The  worm-adjusting  screws 
are  locked  in  position  by  the  worm-adjusting  screw  clamp  plugs 
which  are  secured  by  the  worm-adjusting  screw  clamp  screws.  The 
worm  knobs  are  secured  to  the  worms  by  taper  pins.  The  exterior 
of  the  worm  knobs  is  straight  knurled  to  facilitate  turning.  The 
guide  plate  is  screwed  in  its  threaded  seat  in  the  bottom  of  the  case 
and  retained  in  position  by  the  guide-plate  lock  screw. 

DISASSEMBLING    AND   ASSEMBLING. 

To  disassemble,  remove  the  index-bar  mechanism,  which  is  held  in 
place  by  two  index-bar  screws.  Take  out  the  three  range-ring 
screws  and  the  two  corrector-scale  screws  and  remove  the  range  ring 
and  the  corrector  scale.  Remove  the  guide-plate  lock  screw  and 
unscrew  the  guide  plate,  using  a  teat  wrench.  To  remove  the  worm 
knobs  from  the  worms,  drive  out  the  taper  pins.  Loosen  the  worm- 
adjusting  screw  clamp  screws,  which  release  the  worm-adjusting 
screw  clamp  plugs.  Remove  the  worm-adjusting  screws.  The 
worms  can  now  be  removed  by  turning.  The  corrector-scale  support 


32 

and  range-ring  carrier  can  then  be  removed.  To  remove  the  worm 
cases,  loosen  the  worm-case  clamp  screws,  which  release  the  worm- 
case  clamp  plugs. 

Assemble  in  reverse  order. 

ADJUSTMENT. 

Backlash  or  lost  motion  may  appear  between  the  collars  of  the 
worms  and  the  fiber  washers  endwise;  between  the  worm  teeth  of 
the  range-ring  carrier  or  the  corrector-scale  support  and  the  threads 
of  their  respective  worms. 

To  remove  the  end  backlash,  loosen  the  worm-adjusting  screw 
clamp  screw,  which  releases  the  worm-adjusting  screw  clamp  plug; 
then  turn  the  worm-adjusting  screws  clockwise,  using  a  screw  driver r 
until  the  end  play  is  removed  and  there  is  sufficient  friction  to  prevent 
accidental  turning  of  the  worms.  The  worm- ad  justing  screw  clamp 
plugs  must  be  firmly  clamped  after  adjusting  by  tightening  the 
worm-adjusting  screw  clamp  screws,  which  secures  the  worm-adjust- 
ing screws  against  rotation. 

Should  backlash  appear  between  the  worm  teeth  of  the  range-ring 
carrier  or  the  corrector-scale  support  and  the  threads  of  their  respec- 
tive worms,  it  can  readily  be  removed  by  loosening  the  worm-case 
clamp  screws,  which  release  the  worm-case  clamp  plugs,  and  then 
turning  the  worm  cases,  using  a  screw  driver  in  the  slot  at  the  rear 
end,  in  which  the  worms  are  eccentrically  mounted,  so  as  to  bring 
the  worms  in  closer  contact  with  the  worm  teeth.  The  worm-case 
clamp  plugs  must  be  firmly  clamped  after  adjusting  by  tightening 
the  worm-case  clamp  screws  which  secures  the  worms  cases  against 
rotation. 

OPERATION. 

First.  Turn  the  worm  knob,  pinned  to  the  worm  and  located  at 
the  front-right  side  of  the  fuze  setter,  until  the  desired  range  on  the 
range  ring  registers  with  the  range  index. 

Second.  Turn  the  worm  knob,  pinned  to  the  worm  and  located  at 
the  front-left  side  of  the  fuze  setter,  until  the  graduated  line  on  the 
corrector  scale,  which  indicates  the  desired  correction  for  height  of 
burst,  registers  with  the  engraved  arrow  on  the  case. 

The  graduation,  numbered  30  and  indicated  by  an  arrow  head,  is 
the  normal  height  of  burst  under  normal  conditions.  A  decreased 
reading  on  the  corrector  scale  decreases  the  height  of  burst  and  in- 
creases the  range,  and  increased  reading  increases  the  height  of  burst 
and  shortens  the  range. 

To  set  a  fuze,  remove  the  waterproof  cover,  place  the  fuze  setter 
over  the  fuze  and  turn  until  the  slot  in  the  bottom  of  the  range-ring 
carrier  engages  with  the  rotating  pin  in  the  graduated  time  train 


33 


ring  of  the  fuze.  The  guide  plate  and  conical  interior  of  the  range- 
ring  carrier  will  then  rest  upon  the  fuze.  Turn  the  fuze  setter  clock- 
wise, as  indicated  by  the  arrow  on  the  corrector  scale,  until  the  stop 
pin  fastened  to  the  corrector-scale  support  engages  with  the,  fixed 
stop  pin  in  the  body  of  the  fuze  and  further  motion  is  prevented. 

The  pointer,  which  is  attached  to  the  top  of  the  corrector  scale, 
should  register  with  the  graduated  line  on  the  closing  cap,  to  indi- 
cate that  the  stop  pin  of  the  fuze  setter  and  the  fixed-stop  pin  of 
the  fuze  are  in  contact.  This  pointer  is  added  as  the  graduated  time 
train  ring  of  the  fuze  has  tendency  to  stick  or  to  bind  to  such  a  de- 
gree as  to  indicate  that  the  stop  pin  of  the  fuze  setter  and  the  fixed- 
stop  pin  of  the  fuze  are  in  contact. 

Cards  for  recording  the  results  of  tests  of  the  fuze  setters  are  fur- 
nished by  the  Ordnance  Department  for  each  size  of  gun,  howitzer, 
or  mortar,  on  which  computed  problems  of  inspection  are  given  as 
indicated  below.  The  examples  given  below  are  for  2.95-inch 
mountain  gun.  The  cards  for  other  calibers  are  similar. 


Range 
ring. 

Corrector 
scale. 

Computed 
fuze 
settings. 

Fuze  settings. 

Measure. 

Error. 

0 
2000 
3750 
4900 

30 
4 
45 
30 

0 
7.84 
13.43 
20.95 

To  check  the  fuze  setter,  set  the  range  ring  and  corrector  scale  to 
that  tabular  readings.  Set  the  fuze  with  the  fuze  setter  and  compare 
the  results  with  the  computed  setting  in  the  table.  Use  shrapnel 
and  not  a  drill  cartridge  in  making  this  test.  When  the  range  index 
registers  with  0  on  the  range  ring  and  the  corrector  scale  at  30,  the 
fuze  is  set  at  0,  and  will  explode  immediately  on  leaving  the  gun. 
When  setting  a  fuze  to  explode  on  impact,  set  the  range  index  at  S 
and  the  corrector  scale  at  30. 


CARE    AND   PRESERVATION. 


The  interior  of  the  fuze  setter  can  be  oiled  by  removing  the  oil-hole 
screws;  the  locations  are  identified  by  the  word  "oil." 
61714—16 3 


Range  table  for  2.95-inch  mountain  gun. 

PROJECTILE,  18  P0I?Ni?S.     MUZZLE  VELOCITY,  750  FEET  PER  SECOND. 


i 

<  a 

s 

0    • 

Sj. 

1 

£ 

&$* 

4. 

a 

*'. 

•L 
o 

O 

ss 

««  a 

-H.2 

•H   . 

^  Q. 

'o  °' 

s 

§  £  f£ 

\    *g  £ 

S 

"75  ^ 

s-2 

"5 

c 

1 

.s"i 

aj 

feS 

•*-"   CO 

£  a 

y 

III 

i  Si 

O 
CD 

11 

5  g 

1 

1 

Q 

1 

o 

X  ^ 

3 

^K 

05  O  ?— 

a^ 

O 

S 

^ 

"5 

03 

M 

3* 

<  " 

<r 

< 

H 

ft 

^ 

"2 

CC 

e 

^ 

> 

^ 

Ffc. 

0             / 

Yds. 

Yds. 

Yds. 

Yds. 

Sees. 

Mils. 

Mils, 

0             / 

Jin.— 

/.»: 

Feet. 

100.... 

22 

3.5 

2.5 

0.0 

0.1 

0.3 

0.09 

OvOI 

29 

118.5 

749 

2 

200... 

51 

3.5 

5.0 

.0 

.2 

.6 

.2 

M 

58 

59.3 

748 

7 

300.... 

1    20 

3.5 

7.6 

.1 

.3 

1.0 

.3 

.62 

1    ;T7 

39.5 

747 

12 

400.... 

1    49 

3.4 

10.1 

.1 

.5 

1.4 

.4 

1    56 

29.4 

746 

18 

500.... 

2    19 

3.4 

12.7 

.2 

.6 

1.7 

.5 

!04 

2   26 

<,  ^-  4 

745 

24 

600.... 

2    49 

3.3 

15.2 

.2 

.8 

2.1 

.6 

.05 

2    56' 

JS.  4 

744 

81 

700.... 

3    19 

3.3 

17.8 

.3 

1.0 

2.5 

.8 

.06 

3    §& 

1&5  . 

743 

3'S 

800.... 

3    50 

3.2 

20.3 

.4 

1.2 

2.9 

1.0 

.07 

3    57 

14,4 

741 

46 

900  

4    21 

3.2 

22.9 

.  5 

1.5 

3.2 

1.2 

.09 

4    28 

n,i 

7O 

56 

1,000.... 

4    52 

3.1 

25.4 

.  6 

1  8 

3.6 

1.4 

.11 

4    59 

its 

7*3 

67 

j  S.S16 

0.232 

100.... 

5    24 

3.1 

28.0 

.7 

2.1 

4.0 

1.6 

.13 

5    31 

10.3 

73$ 

£1 

200... 

5    56 

3.1 

30.6 

.9 

2.5 

4.4 

1.8 

.15 

6      3 

9.4 

73-£ 

95 

300.... 

6    28 

3.1 

33.2 

1.1 

2.9 

4.8 

2.1 

.17 

6    35 

8.6 

7$2 

112 

400.... 

7    00 

3.0 

35.8 

1.3 

3.3 

5.2 

2.4 

.20 

7      7 

7.9 

72^ 

130 

500.... 

7    32 

3.0 

38.4 

1.6 

3.  7 

5.7 

2.8 

.23 

7    39 

7.3 

727" 

ioo 

600.... 

8      4 

3.0 

41.0 

1.9 

4.2 

6.2 

3.2 

.26 

8    11 

6.8 

724 

i?2 

700.... 

8    37 

3.0 

43.6 

2.2 

4.8 

6.6 

3.6 

.30 

8    44 

6.4 

722 

m 

800.... 

9    10 

2.9 

46.2 

2.5 

5.  4 

7.0 

4.0 

.34 

9     17 

6.0 

719 

2^£ 

900.... 

9    43 

2.9 

48.7 

2.8 

Q.  1 

7.5 

4.4 

.38 

9    50 

5.6 

716 

25tf 

12,000.... 

10    16 

2.9 

51.2 

3.2 

6.9 

8.0 

4.8 

.43 

10    23 

5.3 

713 

280 

•v471 

.3781 

100... 

10    50 

2.8 

53.6 

3.6 

7.7 

8.5 

5.3 

.48 

10    57 

5.0 

710 

311 

200.... 

11    25 

2.8 

56.0 

4.1 

8.6 

9.0 

5.8 

.54 

11    32 

4.7 

707 

344 

300.... 

12      1 

2.8 

58.3 

4.6 

9.5 

9.5 

6.4 

.60 

12      8 

4.4 

704 

379 

400.... 

12    38 

2.7 

60.6 

5.2 

10.5 

10.0 

7.0 

.67 

12    45 

4.2 

700 

416 

.500.... 

13    16 

2.7 

62.9 

5.8 

11.6 

10.5 

7.7 

.74 

13    23 

4.0 

697 

456 

•600.... 

13    55 

2.6 

65.1 

6.5 

12.8 

11.0 

8.4 

.82 

14      2 

3.8 

693 

499 

700.... 

14    34 

2.5 

67.3 

7.3 

14.0 

11.6 

9.1 

.90 

14    41 

3.6 

689 

545 

800... 

15    15 

2.4 

69.  5 

8.2 

15.3 

12.1 

9.8 

.98 

15    22 

3.4 

686 

594 

900     . 

15    57 

2.4 

7L6 

9.2 

16.7 

12.6 

10.5 

1.06 

16      4 

3.2 

6S2 

647 

3,000.... 

16    40 

2.3 

73.7 

10.3 

18.3 

13.2 

11.2 

1.14 

16    47 

3.1 

678 

703 

3.954 

.  523 

100.... 

17    24 

2.3 

75.7 

11.5 

20.0 

13.8 

12.0 

.23 

17    31 

2.9 

674 

763 

200.... 

18    10 

2.2 

77.7 

12.8 

21.8 

14.3 

12.8 

.32 

18    17 

2.8 

671 

827 

300.... 

18    58 

2.1 

79.7 

14.2 

23.7 

14.9 

13.6 

.42 

19      5 

2.7 

667 

895 

400  

19    48 

2.0 

81.6 

15.8 

25.7 

15.5 

14.5 

.52 

19    55 

2.5 

663 

968 

500.... 

20    39 

.9 

83.5 

17.5 

27.8 

16.1 

15.4 

.62 

20    46 

2.4 

660 

1,046 

600.... 

21    32 

.9 

85.4 

19.3 

30.0 

16.8 

16.3 

1.72 

21    39 

2.3 

656 

1,129 

700.... 

22    37 

.8 

87.2 

21.2 

32.4 

17.4 

17.3 

1.82 

22    34 

2.2 

652 

1,218 

800.... 

23    24 

.7 

89.0 

23.2 

34.9 

18.1 

18.3 

1.92 

23    31 

2.1 

648 

1,313 

900  

24    23 

.7 

90.8 

25.3 

37.4 

18.8 

19.4 

2.02 

24    30 

2.0 

645 

1,414 

4,000.... 

25    24 

.6 

92.6 

27.5 

40.0 

19.5 

20.5 

2.12 

25    31 

1.9 

641 

1,521 

3.087 

.670 

100... 

26    27 

1.6 

94.4 

29.8 

42.7 

20.2 

21.6 

2.23 

26    34 

1.8 

638 

1,634 

200.... 

27    32 

1.5 

96.2 

32.2 

45.5 

20.9 

22.8 

2.34 

27    39 

1.7 

634 

1,753 

SUBCALIBER 


VII.] 

The  sulfoealiber  Cartridge  is  used  jfaf  subcaliber  practice,  ft  .cffMsts 
of  a  .30-caJUber  subca^ber  barrel  17,  flinches  long,  mounted1  axiMly 
in  a  bronze  subcaliber  cartridge  case,  &&d  resembles  in  weight  aM 
Exterior  dimensions  the  ammunition  regtferly  used  with  the  gun.- 
The  breech  end  of  the  subcaliber  barrel  is  shewed  into  the  base  of 
^t/foe  subcaliber  .cartridge,  while  the  muzzle  end!-  is  threaded  to  take 
'the  o^iva'l-^ha,pe,^.  head,  which  accurately  fits  tie  bore  at  the  Iront 
end  of  tthe  :aufe^liber  cartridge  case  and  is  capable  of  longitudinal 


35 

motion  to  allow  for  expansion  of  the  barrel.  Two  flat  steel  extractor 
springs  are  each  assembled  to  the  base  by  an  extractor-spring  screw. 

During  subcaliber  practice  the  extractor  of  the  gun  will  be  removed 
in  order  to  prevent  the  breechblock  from  defacing  the  base  of  the 
subcaliber  cartridge.  The  subcaliber  cartridge  is  inserted  and  pushed 
home  in  the  gun.  The  subcaliber  cartridge,  caliber  .30,  is  then 
inserted  in  the  chamber  of  the  subcaliber  barrel  until  its  rim  comes 
in  contact  with  the  extractor  springs.  The  breech  of  the  gun  is 
closed,  the  face  of  the  breechblock  coming  in  contact  with  the  sub- 
caliber  cartridge,  caliber  .30,  shoves  it  to  its  seat,  compressing  the 
extractor  springs.  When  the  breech  is  opened  the  extractor  springs 
throw  the  case  of  the  subcaliber  cartridge,  caliber  .30,  far  enough  to 
the  rear  to  permit  its  removal  by  the  fingers. 

The  ammunition  for  United  States  magazine  rifles  of  any  model 
must  not  be  used  in  subcaliber  cartridges,  the  primers  not  being 
adapted  for  the  blow  of  the  firing  pins  of  cannon.  A  special  caliber 
.30  cartridge  has  been  adopted  for  this  purpose,  and  requisitions  for 
subcaliber  ammunition  should  call  for  "  subcaliber  cartridges,  cali- 
ber .30." 

As  the  residue  from  smokeless  powder,  if  not  completely  removed, 
corrodes  the  bore  in  a  short  time,  the  subcaliber  cartridges  should  be 
carefully  cleaned  after  use.  The  bore  should  be  cleaned  with  a  rag 
saturated  with  soda  water  (one-half  pound  sal  soda  to  1  gallon  boiling 
water)  and  wiped  thoroughly  dry  with  a  clean  rag.  Then  oil  the  bore 
with  a  light  coating  of  light  slushing  oil  or  other  suitable  oil. 

DRILL    CARTRIDGE. 
[Plate  VII.] 

The  " drill  cartridge"  is  a  dummy  cartridge  for  use  in  drilling  can- 
noneers in  the  service  of  the -gun.  It  is  a  bronze  casting  of  the  shape 
of  the  service  shrapnel  ammunition  and  is  fitted  at  the  point  with  a 
Frankford  Arsenal  21-second  combination  fuze.  Burned-out  fuze 
parts  that  have  been  condemned  or  parts  rejected  by  inspectors  of 
the  regular  service  fuze  may  be  used.  Time  trains,  percussion  and 
concussion  elements  will  be  omitted.  Fixed  stop  pin  and  rotating 
pin  of  new  design  will  be  used.  This  arrangement  is  for  the  instruc- 
tion of  cannoneers  in  fuze  setting. 

Drill  cartridges  in  the  service,  provided  with  a  dummy  fuze  similar 
to  the  15-second  combination  fuze,  will  be  fitted  with  movable  gradu- 
ated rings  when  the  batteries  are  provided  with  shrapnel  having  the 
21-second  combination  fuze. 


36 


SUBCALIBER    AND   DRILL    CARTRIDGE    KIT. 

The  subcaliber  and  drill  cartridge  kit  consists  of: 


3  drill  cartridges. 

1  subcaliber  cartridge. 

2  extractor  springs. 

2  extractor-spring  screws. 

1  cleaning  rod. 

1  eyepiece. 

1  extension  piece. 

1  graduated  time-train  ring. 

1  time-train  ring. 

1  locking-shoe  set  screw. 


1  locking  shoe. 

1  bristle  cleaning  brush. 

1  pin  wrench. 

1  storage  chest. 

3  rotating  pins  with  locking  pins. 

1  closing  cap. 

1  closing-cap  set  screw. 

1  closing  cap  wrench. 

3  fixed  stop  pins  with  screws. 


One  subcaliber  and  drill  cartridge  kit  is  issued  for  each  gun. 


Part   I    (b).  THE    2,95-INCH   MOUNTAIN-GUN    CARRIAGE   AND 

SIGHTS, 

Weights,  principal  dimensions,  etc. 

Weight  of  carriage pounds. .  595 

Weight  of  gun  and  carriage do 830 

Diameter  of  wheels inches. .  36 

Width  of  track do 32 

Length  of  recoil  of  gun  on  carriage do 14 

Height  of  axis  of  gun do 26 

Maximum  angle  of  elevation degrees. .  27 

Maximum  angle  of  depression do 10 

Amount  of  traverse  of  gun  on  carriage do 0 

Nomenclature  of  parts  of  the  carriage. 


Name  of  part. 

Location,  etc. 

Class. 

Section. 

Axletree,  consists  of— 
Axletree  body  

>      IV 

2 

\xletree  lever 

On  axletree  body 

Axletree-lever  nut  

Holds  lever  to  axletree  body  

Axletree-lever  catch    

In  handle  of  axletree  lever 

\xletree  lever  catch  sprin°r 

do 

Linen  pins  

In  ends  of  axletree        

Linch-pin  springs 

In  linch  pins 

0  062  (•£$)  by  0  362  pin 

do 

Drag  washers                  . 

On  axletree  outside  of  wheels 

Buffer,  complete,  consists  of  — 
Buffer  springs    

In  cradle  liners 

Piston  rod  right 

do 

Piston  rod,  left  

do                                

Piston-rod  handle,  right 

On  rear  end  of  piston  rod 

Piston-rod  handle,  left  

do             

Piston-rod  handle  rivets 

Connect  handle  to  piston  rod  .  - 

Piston  heads 

Piston  screws      

Locks  heads  to  piston  rod  

On  front  end  of  buffer  cvlinder 

Buffer  caps 

Buffer-cap  packings  

Behind  buffer  caps  

Glands  

In  rear  end  of  buffer  cylinder 

Cup-leather  seatings 

Cup-leather  packings  

Between  glands  and  seatings  
Secures  packing  to  cup-leather  seating.  .  . 
Between  glands  and  cup  rings  

Cup  rings 

Piston-rod  packings  

Plugs..  

Closes  filling  and  drain  holes  in  cylinders. 
Connect  filling  and  drain  plugs  
Under  filling  and  drain  plugs  

Chains 

Filling  plug  packings  

Loops  

Secures  plug  chains  to  cradle 

Piston-lock  screws  

On  rear  of  breechblock  

Piston  locks    .  .     .   . 

Hinged  to  lock  screws             

Piston-lock  rivet 

Piston-lock  springs  

On  lock  screw           

Piston-lock  washers 

do 

Cradle,  consists  of  — 
Cradle  body  

Holds  gun  and  buffer  details  
In  buffer  cvlinders  of  cradle 

Cylinder  liners 

0.375  by  3.125  bolt  

In  left  lug  of  cradle    

0.375  crown  nut         .   .   . 

On  bolt                                    

Eyebolts 

Instruction  plate  

Screwed  to  cradle       ! 

Instruction-plate  screws 

Secures  instruction  plate  to  cradle 

Arrow  plates 

Right  bracket  base         .... 

Riveted  on  cradle             

Cradle  axis  bolt,  consists  of  — 
Cradle  axis  bolt  body 

Catch  lever    . 

In  handle  of  cradle  axis  bolt    .  . 

Catch-lever  spring  

....  do  

Catch-lever  split  pin    

Secures  lever  to  cradle  axis  bolt  .  . 

Guard  plate 

On  cradle  axis  bolt                   • 

Guard-plate  screws.  .  . 

Secures  guard  plate  to  cradle  axis  bolt..  . 
On  cradle  axis  bolt  

Catch  

Shaft  -locking  screw 

In  right  lug  of  cradle 

Washer 

On  prnrilA  nvis  hnlt  Ipft.  onH 

0.187  (A)  bv  2.25  sr»lit  nin  In  cradle  axis  bolt,  left  end.  .  . 

(37) 


38 


Nomenclature  of  parts  of  the  carnage — Continued. 


No. 

Name  of  part. 

Location,  etc. 

Class. 

Section. 

1 

1 
1 
1 

1 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 

2 
1 
1 
1 
2 
1 
2 
2 

2 

2 
14 
14 
28 
14 
2 
28 

Elevating  mechanism,  consists  of— 
Elevating  quadrant 

Turns  on  axletree 

>      IV 

2 

Guide  arm 

On  elevating  quadrant  

Guide-arm  pin 

Secures  guide  arm  to  quadrant  ... 

Holds  worm,  gear 

Elevating  sleeve 

On  elevating  spindle     .                

Secures  sleeve  to  spindle 

Elevating-worm  spring 

Against  shoulder  of  sleeve  

Elevating-  worm  spring  cup 

Holds  spring 

Elevating  worm          " 

On  elevating  sleeve  

Elevating-worm  key 

Secures  worm  to  sleeve 

Elevating-sleeve  nut      

On  end  of  elevating  sleeve  

Elevating-sleeve  split  pin 

Secures  sleeve  and  nut  to  spindle 

Elevating  bevel  wheel     

On  rear  end  of  spindle  

Elevating  bevel-wheel  key 

Secures  bevel  wheel  to  spindle 

Elevating  spindle  nut  .        

On  rear  end  of  spindle  

0  25  by  1  75  split  pin 

In  rear  end  of  spindle 

Support  

Bearing  for  front  end  of  spindle  

Elevating  joint  pin 

Secures  elevating  quadrant  to  cradle  
Secures  joint  pin  to  quadrant  

Elevating  joint-pin  stop  screw  
Elevating  pin 

Shaft  for  handwheel 

0  203  by  1  25  split  pins 

Elevating  pinion 

On  right  end^of  elevating  pin       

Elevating-pinion  key 

Elevating  handwheel,  consists  of  — 
Elevating-handwheel  body... 
Elevating-handwheel  key  
Elevating-handwheel  handle. 
Elevating-handwheel  spindle. 
Elevating-handwheel  washer. 
Equalizing  mechanism,  consists  of— 
Spring  carrier 

On  left  end  of  elevating  pin 

Secures  handwheel  to  pin  .        

On  handwheel 

Secures  handle  to  handwheel  

On  spindle 

Near  rack  on  elevating  quadrant 

0.093  (&)  by  1  split  pins.  .   . 

In  spring  carrier                   

Equaiizing"springs 

Between  carrier  and  front  crosspiece  
In  rear  end  of  springs  

Equalizing-spring  bushings  

Equalizing-spring  eyebolts 

Through  holes  in  front  crosspiece  . 

Equalizing-spring  eyelets  

Hold  springs  to  carriers  

Oil  can  case  body,  consists  of  — 
Billet 

On  body 

Body 

Fastened  to  oil  can  case  carrier  . 

Cap  

On  cover  

Cover 

Fastened  to  body 

Cover  chafe 

Filler 

do                                     ..  ..          . 

Trail,  consists  of— 
Trail  side,  right  

Trail  side  left 

Front  crosspiece  

In  front  portion  of  trail           

Front  transom 

In  middle  of  trail 

Rear  transom  

In  rear  of  middle  trail  

Shoe 

In  rear  portion  of  trail 

Scraper  

Rear  under  side  of  trail  

Shoe  handles 

Riveted  to  trail  sides 

Handspike  twisted  dog  chain  
Handspike  chain  eyebolt 

On  top  of  shoe  

do 

Handspike  chain  hook  

do          

Handspike  ring  

do 

Handspike  key7 

do 

Oil-can  case  carrier  

Between  front  and  rear  transoms  . 

0  625  wood  screws  No  8 

In  oil  can  case  carrier 

Oil  can  case  body  

Screwed  on  carrier 

Oil  can  case  cover 

Over  oil-can  case  body 

Supporting  plates  

In  middle  of  lower  edge  of  trail  sides  .  
Between  trail  sides  before  front  transom. 
On  right  side  of  trail 

Strengthening  plate 

Catch  button  

Stop  button 

do 

Distance  plates  

On  bottom  edges  of  trail  near  front 

Name  plate 

Screwed  to  front  crosspiece 

Name-plate  screws  

Secures  name  plate  to  crosspiece 

Front  handles 

On  front  end  of  trail 

Wheels,  complete,  consists  of— 
Boxes  

Flanges  ^  

Hub  bolts  with  nuts  . 

Felloe  segments  

Spokes... 

Clips 

Tires  

Tire  bolts  .  . 

39 

DESCRIPTION    OF    THE    CARRIAGE. 


GENERAL. 


The  2. 95-inch  mountain  gun  carriage  is  of  the  short  recoil  type,  in 
which  the  gun  is  permitted  a  length  of  recoil  upon  the  carriage  suffi- 
cient to  diminish  the  movement  of  the  carriage  on  the  ground,  but  not 
sufficient  to  render  the  carriage  stable. 

The  gun  is  mounted  in  a  cradle,  which  also  forms  a  housing  for 
the  recoil-controlling  parts.  The  cradle  is  fastened,  by  means  of  the 
cradle-axis  bolt,  to  the  trail  and  is  also  fastened  to  the  elevating 
quadrant,  which  in  turn  is  journaled  to  the  axle,  which  passes  through 
the  trail. 

The  principal  parts  of  the  carriage  are: 

1.  The  cradle. 

2.  The  buffer  mechanism. 

3.  The  cradle  axis  bolt. 

4.  The  elevating  mechanism. 

5.  The  trail. 

6.  The  axletree. 

7.  The  wheels. 

A  detailed  description  of  these  parts  follows. 

THE    CRADLE. 

The  cradle  is  a  bronze  casting,  comprising  three  parallel  cylinders. 
The  central  cylinder  supports  the  gun  from  the  breech  to  within  a 
few  inches  of  the  muzzle.  Two  smaller  cylinders  on  the  right  and 
left  sides  of  the  central  one  accommodate  the  buffer.  Each  buffer 
cylinder  is  fitted  with  a  bronze  liner  in  which  are  cut  three  slots  of 
varying  width  from  rear  to  front,  the  purpose  of  the  varying  width 
being  to  maintain  a  constant  pressure  of  the  oil  in  the  cylinder  dur- 
ing the  recoil  of  the  gun.  The  buffer  cylinders  are  connected  by  a 
passageway  near  the  rear  end,  which  equalizes  the  pressure  in  the 
cylinders.  The  forward  ends  of  the  cylinders  are  closed  by  the  buffer 
caps,  which  screw  in  and  compress  a  leather  gasket  (buffer-cap  pack- 
ing) to  make  an  oil-tight  joint.  Near  the  buffer  caps  each  cylinder 
is  provided  with  a  filling  plug  on  top  and  a  drain  plug  underneath; 
the  plugs  are  chained  to  the  cradle  to  prevent  loss  and  are  provided 
with  leather  gaskets  (filling-plug  packings).  The  central  part  of  the 
cradle  is  extended  to  the  rear  underneath  the  breech  of  the  gun  and 
is  provided  with  a  bearing,  which  is  locked  to  the  rear  end  of  the  ele- 
vating quadrant  by  means  of  the  elevating  joint  pin.  In  place  of 
trunnions  there  are  two  lugs  underneath  the  cradle,  through  which 
passes  the  cradle-axis  bolt,  by  means  of  which  the  cradle  is  secured 
to  the  trail.  Riveted  to  the  rear  end  of  the  cylinder  on  the  left-hand 
side  is  a  sight-bracket  base,  in  which  is  seated  the  sight  bracket.  An 
eyobolt  for  lifting  the  cradle  to  pack  is  screwed  into  bosses  at  each 


40 

end  of  this  cylinder.  A  flat  surface  in  a  plane  parallel  to  the  axis  of 
the  bore  of  the  gun  is  finished  on  top  of  the  cradle,  on  which  the  gun- 
ner's quadrant  may  be  placed.  An  instruction  plate  is  screwed  to 
the  cradle  on  the  right  side  of  the  flat  surface  for  the  quadrant.  Two 
arrow  plates  are  soldered  to  the  right  buffer  cylinder,  which  indicate 
the  positions  for  the  cradle  axis-bolt  handle. 


THE    BUFFER    MECHANISM. 


The  piston  rods  are  of  steel  and  threaded  on  both  ends.  The 
piston  head  is  screwed  on  the  front  end  of  the  rod  and  prevented  from 
unscrewing  by  the  piston  screws.  The  rear  ends  of  the  rods  are 
attached  to  the  gun  by  interrupted  screw  threads  and  are  engaged 
or  disengaged  by  a  quarter  turn  of  the  piston  rod;  a  piston  rod  handle 
is  riveted  to  each  rod.  Piston  locks  riveted  to  the  gun  lugs  secure  the 
piston  rods  when  engaged  with  the  gun  lug  threads.  The  piston 
heads  fit  the  interior  of  the  cylinder  liners  closely  so  that  oil  can  not 
pass  except  through  the  liner  orifices.  After  recoil  the  gun  is  re- 
turned to  firing  position  by  means  of  the  two  buffer  springs  surround- 
ing the  piston  rods  and  located  in  the  buffer  cylinders.  The  rear  end 
of  each  cylinder  is  closed  by  means  of  rings  and  gaskets  to  form  oil- 
tight  joints.  The  forward  ring  is  a  cup  leather  seating  screwed  to 
the  cylinder;  it  has  on  annular  recess  on  its  rear  face  in  which  is 
seated  a  molded  leather  cup  packing  ring,  so  shaped  that  pressure  of 
the  oil  in  the  cylinder  forces  a  lip  of  the  leather  against  the  piston  rod 
and  prevents  the  escape  of  oil.  A  small  bronze  cup  ring  follows  and 
between  this  cup  ring  and  the  gland,  which  is  also  screwed  in  the  rear 
end,  is  compressed  a  piston  rod  packing  of  leather. 


CRADLE   AXIS    BOLT. 


The  cradle  axis  bolt  is  a  solid  bar  having  a  handle  forged  on  one 
end  in  which  is  located  a  catch,  consisting  of  a  catch  lever,  catch 
lever  spring,  and  catch,  by  means  of  which  the  cradle  axis  bolt  is 
locked  to  the  front  crosspiece  of  the  trail.  A  bolt  in  the  left  lug  of 
the  cradle  engages  a  groove  in  the  cradle  axis  bolt  s'o  as  to  prevent 
its  longitudinal  movement  and  a  shaft  locking  screw  in  the  right 
cradle  lug  projects  into  a  slot  cut  partially  around  the  bolt,  thus 
limiting  its  rotary  movement.  The  cradle  axis  bolt  is  so  cut  that 
in  one  position  it  engages  in  a  seat  provided  for  it  in  the  trail,  and 
90  degrees  from  that  position  locks  itself  to  the  trail  without  pre- 
venting the  cradle  being  elevated  or  depressed. 


THE    ELEVATING    GEAR. 


The  elevating  quadrant,  by  means  of  which  the  cradle  is  elevated  or 
depressed,  is  made  of  cast  steel  having  a  worm  wheel  segment  con- 
nected by  means  of  an  arm  to  the  hub  which  engages  the  cradle  axis 


41 

bolt.  A  yoke  on  the  rear  end  of  the  segment  engages  a  lug  on  the 
cradle,  to  which  it  is  locked  by  means  of  the  elevating  joint  pin. 
This  pin  is  retained  in  the  quadrant  when  disengaged  from  the  cradle 
by  the  elevating  joint  pin  stop  screw  located  in  one  lug  of  the  yoke. 
The  hub  which  is  the  front,  fastening  for  the  quadrant  engages  the 
cradle  axis  bolt  and  is  cut  away  on  one  side  to  allow  disengagement 
from  the  bolt  when  the  ]atter  is  turned  to  its  unlocked  position.  A 
guide  arm  which  is  pinned  to  the  quadrant  arm  just  below  the  hub  is 
used  to  secure  the  quadrant  to  the  front  crosspiece  of  the  trail  when 
in  pack.  A  spring  carrier  located  on  the  quadrant  arm  near  the 
rack  teeth  projects  on  both  sides,  each  projection  having  a  slot  near 
its  end  which  engages  the  eyelet  of  an  equalizing  spring  extending 
back  to  the  front  crosspiece.  The  function  of  these  springs  is  to 
maintain  as  near  as  possible  a  uniform  weight  on  the  ele-vating  gear 
when  it  is  being  worked.  Split  pins  hold  the  eyelet  end  of  the  springs 
on  the  carrier  and  the  eyebolt  ends  on  the  rear  face  of  the  front  cross- 
piece.  The  teeth  on  the  quadrant  engage  a  worm  mounted  on  the 
elevating  spindle.  The  latter  is  held  on  its  front  end  by  a  support 
seated  in  the  front  crosspiece  and  near  its  rear  end  by  a  bearing  in  the 
rear  web  of  the  crosspiece.  The  worm  which  engages  the  quadrant 
teeth  is  keyed  to  a  bronze  sleeve  which  in  turn  is  keyed  to  the  spindle. 
Between  the  front  shoulder  of  the  sleeve  and  worm  is  located  a  rubber 
spring  and  cup,  which  allows  a  small  longitudinal  movement  of  the 
worm  on  the  sleeve  during  firing.  A  nut  is  screwed  on  the  rear  end 
of  the  sleeve  and  secures  the  worm  longitudinally;  this  nut  is  held 
in  place  by  a  large  split  pin,  which  also  secures  the  sleeve  on  the 
spindle.  The  portion  of  the  spindle  in  rear  of  its  bearing  in  the  front 
crosspiece  is  fitted  with  a  bevel  wheel  keyed  and  held  in  place  longi- 
tudinally by  a  nut  and  split  pin.  This  wheel  meshes  with  a  pinion 
on  the  right  end  of  the  elevating  pin  which  turns  in  a  bearing  on  the 
left  side  of  the  front  crosspiece.  On  the  left  end  of  the  elevating  pin 
is  located  the  elevating  wheel  keyed  to  the  pin  and  held  by  a  split  pin. 
A  handle  is  located  on  the  rim  of  the  wheel  by  means  of  which  it  may 
be  rotated. 

THE    TRAIL. 

The  trail  is  made  of  steel  and  consists  of  two  side  plates,  connected 
at  the  front  by  the  front  crosspiece,  at  the  rear  by  the  shoe,  and  in  the 
middle  by  the  front  and  rear  transoms  and  strengthening  plate. 
The  front  crosspiece  is  a  yoke  or  box  of  phosphor  bronze,  and  contains 
bearings  for  the  cradle  axis  bolt,  axletree,  elevating  spindle  support, 
elevating  spindle,  and  elevating  pin.  The  shoe  at  the  rear  end  of  the 
trail  is  also  a  phosphor-bronze  casting,  and  is  provided  with  a  steel 
scraper  or  spade  on  the  underside  which  checks  the  movement  of  the 
carriage  on  the  ground;  the  shoe  also  carries  a  socket  on  its  upper  side 
in  which  can  be  fitted  a  handspike  used  for  moving  the  carriage  in 


42 

azimuth.  Beside  this  socket  is  fastened  a  chain  to  which  is  attached 
a  key  for  securing  the  handspike  to  the  shoe.  Two  front  handles  and 
two  shoe  handles  riveted  to  the  trail  sides  are  provided  for  lifting  the 
trail  to  pack.  To  the  front  and  rear  transoms  is  riveted  the  oil  can 
case  carrier.  On  the  lower  edge  of  the  trail  sides  are  riveted  the  dis- 
tance plates  and  supporting  plates  which  form  bearing  points  for  the 
trail  on  the  pack  frame.  The  stop  button  and  catch  button  fastened 
to  the  right  side  of  the  trail  limit  the  movement  of  the  axle  tree  handle 
and  secure  it  in  the  locked  position.  A  name  plate  is  screwed  to  the 
rear  face  of  the  front  crosspiece.  The  name  plate  gives  the  serial 
number  of  the  carriage,  the  model,  name  of  manufacturer,  year  of 
completion,  and  initials  of  inspector. 


THE    AXLETREE. 


The  axle  tree  is  a  solid  cylindrical  bar  with  flats  cut  on  two  sides  so 
that  it  can  enter  its  seat  in  the  front  crosspiece  of  the  trail  at  a  certain 
angle  only,  and  when  given  a  one-quarter  turn  is  secure  therein.  Just 
outside  the  bearing  for  the  right  side  of  the  trail  the  axle  is  fitted  with 
an  axle  tree  lever  having  a  spring  catch  on  its  handle  which  engages 
the  projecting  button  on  the  trail  side  and  locks  the  axle  tree  in  its 
proper  relation  to  the  trail.  The  axes  of  the  tapering  axle  arms  are 
inclined  slightly  to  the  axis  of  the  axle  so  as  to  make  the  underside 
horizontal  and  the  lower  spokes  of  the  wheel  vertical.  The  wheel  is 
secured  to  the  axle  by  a  linch  pin  passing  through  the  axle  arm.  A 
heavy  steel  washer  lies  between  it  and  the  outer  end  of  the  wheel 
hub.  The  linch  pin  has  a  wire  spring  to  retain  it  in  the  axle;  the 
washer  has  a  large  eye  or  loop  to  which  a  dragrope  may  be  attached. 


THE    WHEELS. 


The  wheels  are  36  inches  in  diameter.  Each  has  14  hickory  spokes 
and  an  ash  felloe  built  up  of  seven  segments,  a  bronze  hub  box  which 
is  connected  through  the  spokes  to  a  bronze  flange  on  the  outside  by 
seven  bolts,  and  a  steel  tire.  The  tire  is  If  inches  wide  and  f  inch 
thick.  The  felloe  segments  are  joined  by  sheet-metal  clips  bolted 
through  the  felloe  to  the  tire.  The  hub  box  has  a  taper  fit  on  the  axle. 


DISMOUNTING   AND    MOUNTING    GUN    AND    CARRIAGE. 

To  dismount  the  gun. — Pull  back  the  piston  locks  to  clear  the  ends 
of  the  piston  rods,  and  then  turn  the  two  piston-rod  handles  upward 
to  a  vertical  position.  The  gun  is  now  free  and  may  be  withdrawn 
by  supporting  the  breech  and  pulling  to  the  rear. 

To  'dismount  the  cradle. — Elevate  the  cradle  to  extreme  elevation 
and  then  depress  until  certain  marks  on  the  last  thread  of  the  worm 
come  opposite  the  sides  of  the  elevating  quadrant.  For  new  work 
and  repairs  a  stop  surface  between  the  elevating  quadrant  and  front 
cross  piece  automatically  stops  the  quadrant  at  the  proper  elevation 
for  disassembling.  Press  the  catch  in  the  handle  of  the  cradle  axis 
bolt,  turn  the  handle  to  the  rear  90°,  or  opposite  the  " unlocked " 
plate  on  the  cradle;  give  the  elevating  joint  pin  one-quarter  of  a  turn 
and  draw  it  to  the  right,  releasing  the  cradle  from  the  elevating 
quadrant;  the  cradle  is  now  free  and  may  be  lifted  from  the  trail. 
The  elevating  wheel,  should  not  be  turned  while  the  cradle  is  dis- 
mounted. 

To  dismount  wheels  and  axle. — To  detach  the  axle  and  wheels 
support  the  front  of  the  trail  by  the  two  handles,  press  the  axle  lever 
catch  in  the  handle  of  the  axletrce  lever  and  turn  the  lever  to  a  vertical 
position;  the  trail  is  then  free  and  may  be  lowered  to  the  ground. 
The  wheels  may  be  dismounted  from  the  axle  by  removing  the  linch- 
pins and  drag  washers. 

To  mount  the  wheels  and  axle  to  the  trail.— Place  the  axle  in  the  trail 
with  tho  lever  in  a  vertical  position,  and  turn  it  until  the  catch  in  the 
lever  becomes  engaged  with  the  catch  button  on  the  trail  side;  then 
lift  the  trail  and  put  on  the  wheels,  locking  them  on  with  the  drag 
washers  and  linchpins. 

To  mount  the  cradle.— Sees  that  the  elevating  quadrant  is  in  its  cor- 
rect position  near  extreme  elevation  with  the  assembling  marks  on 
the  worm  embracing  the  elevating  quadrant.  Drop  the  cradle  axis 
bolt  with  its  handle  in  the  extreme  rear  position  into  the  jaws 
or  bearings  provided  for  it  in  trail  and  elevating  quadrant,  then 
turn  the  cradle  axis  bolt  handle  forward  until  it  is  locked  by  the 
spring  catch;  lower  the  rear  end  of  cradle  until  the  lug  on  its  under- 
side lies  in  the  yoke  of  the  elevating  quadrant  and  secure  it  with  the 
elevating  joint  pin. 

To  mount  the  gun. — Lay  the  cradle  horizontal,  see  that  the  bore  for 
the  gun  is  clean  and  that  the  piston-rod  handles  are  vertical,  place  the 
front  collar  of  the  gun  on  the  bridge  at  the  rear  end  of  the  cradle  and 
push  the  gun  slowly  forward  until  the  guido  button  underneath  the 

(43) 


44 

barrel  enters  its  groove  in  the  bridge,  push  the  gun  home,  turn  the 
handles  of  the  piston  rods  outward  90°,  and  engage  the  piston  locks 
over  the  ends  of  the  piston  rods. 

To  remove  piston  rods  from  buffer  cylinders. — If  required  to  remove 
the  pistons  from  the  buffers,  first  dismount  the  gun  as  described,  and 
provide  a  receptacle  large  enough  to  hold  about  4  quarts  of  oil. 
Depress  the  cradle  about  5°,  unscrew  the  filling  and  drain  plugs,  and 
allow  the  oil  to  run  out.  Insert  the  spring-compression  tool  in  the 
filling  hole  to  retain  the  buffer  spring,  unscrew  the  buffer  cap,  and 
remove  the  leather  washer;  take  out  the  set  screw  from  the  piston 
head,  then  unscrew  and  remove  the  piston  head.  Place  the  hollow 
end  of  the  handspike  against  the  front  end  of  the  buffer  spring  and 
compress  this  spring  enough  to  withdraw  the  spring-compression  tool, 
then  remove  the  spring  and  withdraw  the  piston  rod  to  the  rear. 
It  may  be  necessary  to  slack  back  the  gland. 

To  replace  piston  rods. — Insert  the  piston  rod  from  the  rear,  taking 
care  that  the  packing  and  gland  are  in  position;  then  enter  the  buffer 
spring  from  the  front  and  compress  it,  using  the  hollow  end  of  the 
handspike,  so  that  the  spring-compression  tool  when  pushed  down  the 
filling  hole  will  engage  the  last  coil  but  one.  Remove  the  handspike 
and  screw  on  the  piston  head,  securing  it  in  position  for  the  piston 
screw.  The  piston  screw  must  be  tight  and  secure,  so  that  it  will  not 
work  out  and  damage  the  cylinder.  Replace  the  buffer-cap  washer 
and  buffer  cap  and  screw  the  latter  down  hard.  Replace  the  drain 
plug  and  withdraw  the  spring-compression  tool. 

To  fill  the  buffer  cylinders. — Give  the  cradle  2°  or  3°  of  elevation 
and  fill  slowly  through  the  filling-plug  hole;  when  apparently  full 
allow  a  few  minutes  for  the  oil  to  settle  and  pocketed  air  to  escape, 
and  then  refill.  See  that  the  filling-plug  gasket  is  in  place  and  screw 
in  the  plug  tightly.  After  a  few  rounds,  especially  if  fired  rapidly, 
the  gun  may  remain  slightly  out  of  battery.  This  is  due  to  the  heat- 
ing and  expansion  of  the  oil  and  may  be  remedied  by  bringing  the  gun 
to  2°  or  3°  of  elevation,  removing  the  filling  plug  and  permitting  the 
excess  oil  to  run  put. 

About  6|  pints  of  oil  are  required  to  fill  the  buffer  cylinder.  Hy- 
droline  oil  of  a  specific  gravity  of  0.85  is  furnished  by  the  Ordnance 
Department  for  use  in  these  cylinders;  it  is  characterized  by  its  low 
freezing  point  and  by  its  noncorrosive  action  on  metals.  The  oil 
used  in  the  cylinders  should  be  clean  and  free  from  grit  and  dirt;  to 
insure  this  it  should  be  strained  through  a  clean  piece  of  linen  or 
muslin  before  using.  In  emergencies  during  war  water  may  be  used 
in  the  cylinders.  This  should  be  done  only  when  absolutely  necessary, 
and  never  in  freezing  weather,  and  as  soon  as  practicable  the  cylinder 
should  be  emptied,  cleaned,  and  thoroughly  dried  and  filled  with 
hydroline  oil. 


45 

CARE  AND  CLEANING  OF  BUFFER  CYLINDERS  AND  OTHER  PARTS  OF 

CARRIAGE. 

The  carriage  is  a  machine  for  controlling  the  recoil  of  the  gun  and 
must  be  properly  cleaned  and  cared  for  to  insure  its  working  cor- 
rectly. The  officers  responsible  for  the  efficiency  of  the  battery 
should  familiarize  themselves  with  the  carriage  mechanism  and  with 
the  foregoing  instructions  as  to  the  method  of  mounting  and  dis- 
mounting the  various  parts,  and  should  see  that  the  carriage  is 
properly  handled,  cleaned,  and  cared  for.  The  following  general 
directions  for  its  care  and  cleaning  are  given: 

The  buffers  should  be  dismounted  and  examined  for  roughness, 
broken  or  weakened  buffer  springs,  etc.,  at  least  once  every  three  or 
four  months.  If  any  scored  or  rusted  spots  are  noticed  they  should 
be  smoothed  or  cleaned  by  careful  use  of  a  dead-smooth  file  or  fine 
emery  cloth.  Emery  should  be  used  with  great  caution  and  care 
should  be  taken  that  no  emery  is  allowed  to  remain  in  the  cylinders. 
Where  unusual  rubbing  or  scoring  has  occurred,  the  facts  will  be 
reported  to  the  officer  of  the  Ordnance  Department,  charged  with 
the  duty  of  keeping  the  battery  in  repair,  for  his  information  and 
action. 

The  parts  should  be  reassembled  immediately  after  cleaning  and 
inspection  and  the  cylinders  filled  with  the  hydro  line  oil  issued  for  that 
purpose.  The  gun  should  be  pulled  from  battery  by  hand  and  per- 
mitted to  counterrecoil  rapidly  to  insure  that  all  parts  are  in  proper 
position  for  firing.  This  should  never  he  done,  however,  unless  the 
cylinder  is  known  to  he  filled  with  oil.  In  removing  and  inserting  the 
piston  rod  care  should  be  taken  to  keep  it  central  in  the  cylinder,  so 
as  not  to  bind,  burr,  or  spring  any  parts.  The  dismounting  and 
reassembling  of  the  parts  of. the  cylinder  should  in  every  case  be 
supervised  by  a  commissioned  officer.  Before  firing  an  inspection 
should  be  made  to  ascertain  that  the  different  parts  are  correctly 
assembled. 

The  recoil-cylinder  oil  should  be  stored  in  the  closed  cans  provided 
for  the  purpose,  and  be  carefully  protected  from  dirt,  sand,  or  water. 
Oil  withdrawn  from  cylinders  and  containing  any  sediment  must  not 
be  used  again  for  any  purpose  until  it  has  been  allowed  to  settle  for 
not  less  than  24  hours.  When  sediment  has  thus  been  permitted  to 
settle,  great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  disturb  it  in  removing  the  oil. 
To  insure  the  cleanliness  of  all  cylinder  oil  it  should  be  strained 
through  a  clean  piece  of  linen  or  muslin  before  using. 

The  elevating  mechanism  should  be  dismounted  at  least  once  every 
six  months  for  thorough  cleaning  and  overhauling.  It  should  be 
kept  well  oiled  and  should  work  easily.  If  at  any  time  the  mecha- 
nism works  harder  than  usual,  it  should  be  immediately  overhauled 
and  the  cause  discovered  and  removed. 


46 

The  nuts  on  the  hub  bolts  should  be  tightened  monthly  the  first 
year  of  service  and  twice  a  year  thereafter.  The  ends  of  the  bolts 
should  be  lightly  riveted  over  to  prevent  the  nut  from  unscrewing. 

The  wooden  parts  of  the  wheels  are  made  of  thoroughly  seasoned 
materials,  and  the  hub  bolts,  when  the  wheels  are  issued,  are  properly 
tightened;  but  all  wood  is  susceptible  to  change  with  atmospheric 
conditions,  so  that  the  spokes  speedily  become  loose,  and  if  the 
wheel  is  used  in  this  condition  it  will  rapidly  be  made  unserviceable 
and  may  be  damaged  beyond  repair. 

The  importance  of  strict  compliance  with  these  instructions  can  not 
be  overestimated. 


SIGHTS. 

The  arrangement  for  sighting  and  laying  the  piece  include  a  com- 
bined front  and  rear  sight  (open  sight)  and  a  panoramic  sight, 
either  of  which  may  be  mounted  in  a  seat  in  the  top  end  of  the  sight 
shank.  The  sight  'bracket  which  supports  the  sight  shank  is  assem- 
bled to  the  sight-bracket  base,  riveted  to  the  left  side  of  the  cradle. 

SIGHT    MODEL   OF    1912. 

The  upper  end  of  the  sight  bracket  is  provided  with  bearings  for 
the  shank  socket.  This  shank  socket  is  pivoted  on  an  axis  parallel 
to  the  axis  of  bore,  which,  by  means  of  a  leveling  screw  and  cross  level, 
serves  to  correct  for  difference  of  level  of  wheels. 

The  shank-socket  cover  has  two  lugs  on  its  inner  surface  which  sup- 
port springs  and  sleeves.  These  sleeves  are  pressed  by  the  springs 
against  the  shank  and  force  it  against  the  walls  of  the  shank  socket, 
thus  taking  up  lost  motion. 

Upon  the  left  side  of  the  sight  shank  is  attached  a  level  bracket, 
in  which,  is  mounted  a v level  screw  and  an  elevation-level  holder, 
the  construction  allowing  the  movement  ot  the  level  holder  through 
the  arc  of  a  circle  in  the  vertical  plane  parallel  to  that  of  the  sight 
shank.  The  amount  of  angular  movement  of  the  level  holder  is 
measured  by  the  level  scale,  graduated  on  the  level  holder  with  an 
index  on  the  level  bracket,  supplemented  by  a  level  micrometer  disk 
on  the  level  screw.  The  level  scale  is  graduated  in  sixty-fourths  of 
the  circumference,  and  one  complete  turn  of  the  screw  moves  the 
level  holder  through  one  of  these  divisions.  The  level  micrometer 
disk  on  the  level  screw  has  100  divisions,  so  that  one  of  these  divisions 
corresponds  to  1  mil  ( l  fa 0  of  the  range).  The  divisions  of  the  cir- 
cular scale  are  marked  1  to  5  and,  in  connection  with  the  level  disk,  &re 
read  100,  200,  etc.,  plus  the  indications  of  the  latter.  The  3  or  300 
corresponds  to  the  mean  or  zero  position  of  the  elevation-level  holder. 

This  arrangement  of  graduated  level  serves  the  same  purpose  as  the 
.ra^e  quadrant  on  other  carriages;  it  has  the  advantage  that  the 
$igfi  and  quadrant  is  combined  in  one  instrument,  thereby  permitting 
the.  jj^u  ties  of  laying  for  direction  and  elevation  to  be  performed  by  one 
man. 

The^^ht  shank  consists  of  a  steel  arc.  It  slides  in  guides  in  the 
shank  sjjgket  and  is  moved  up  and  down  in  elevation  by  a  scroll  gear 
seated  in, a  boss  on  the  shank  socket  and  engaging  in  a  rack  cut  on 

(47) 


48 

the  right  side  of  the  shank.  A  German  silver  range  strip  fits  in  a  dove- 
tailed seat  cut  in  the  rear  face  of  the  sight  shank,  the  index  for  the 
scale  being  placed  upon  the  uppar  rear  corner  of  the  shank  socket. 
The  strip  is  graduated  in  yards  for  the  12^-pound  projectile  only  up 
to  5,000  yards.  The  smallest  division  is  50  yards,  but  smaller 
divisions  may  readily  be  made  with  the  eye. 

The  upper  part  of  the  sight  shank  is  prolonged  to  form  a  support 
for  the  panoramic  sight  or  the-  open  sight.  This  support  has  a  ver- 
tical T  slot  into  which  the  guide  lug  of  the  panoramic  sight  or  open 
sight  fits.  A  clamp  scrsw  with,  a  ratchet  head  is  seated  in  the  sup- 
port and  holds  the  panoramic  sight  or  open  sight  in  position  by 
forcing  it  against  the  ways  of  the  support.  A  small  spring  plunger 
detent  saated  in  the  sight  shank  bears  against  the  ratchet  head  of  the 
clamp  screw  and  fixes  it  in  position. 

The  sight  complete  must  be  removed  from  the  sight-bracket  base  before 
firing. 

OPEN    SIGHT. 

The  peep  sight  and  front  sight  are  self-contained.  The  peep-sight 
support  extends  to  the  front  and  has  a  threaded  seat  to  receive  the 
front  sight. 

The  front  sight  consists  of  two  cross  wires  set  at  an  angle  of  45°  to 
horizontal  in  the  circular  bore  of  the  cross-wire  holder  and  held  in 
place  by  the  cross-wire  ring  and  the  cross-wire  retainer.  The  shank 
of  the  holder  is  threaded  with  32  threads  per  inch,  which  allows  it 
vertical  movement  in  the  holder  sleeve.  The  outside  of  the  holder 
sleeve  is  threaded  with  30  threads  per  inch,  which  allows  it  a  vertical 
movement  in  the  sight  support. 

A  J-inch  split  pin  passes  through  the  arm  and  through  slots  in  the 
cross-wire  holder  and  holder  sleeve  and  fixes  the  cross-wire  holder 
in  a  plane  normal  to  the  line  of  sight,  the  slots  allowing  vertical 
adjustment  by  the  differential  threads  of  the  sleeve. 

The  rear  end  of  the  peep-sight  support  is  fashioned  to  receive  the 
peep-sight  guide.  The  peep-sight  guide  is  located  in  an  opening  in 
the  peep-sight  support  and  is  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  sight.  The 
peep  sight  is  secured  by  clips  to  this  guide  and  is  traversed  along  it  by 
the  peep-sight  screw.  The  latter  passes  through  a  tapped  hole  in  the 
peep  sight  and  is  supported  at  each  end  in  bearings  in  the  peep-sight 
support.  The  screw  is  turned  by  a  knurled  head  at  its  left  end.  The 
peephole  is  0.125  inch  in  diameter.  The  graduations  on  the  deflec- 
tion scale  fixed  to  the  rear  end  of  the  peep-sight  support,  together 
with  the  peep-sight  screw  handle,  serve  to  give  required  deflections 
to  the  peep  sight. 

The  deflection  scale  is  attached  to  the  rear  face  of  the  peep-sight 
guide  and  the  index  for  the  scale  is  on  the  peep  sight.  The  gradua- 
tions are  in  mils,  or  points  equivalent  to  one  one-thousandth  part  of 


49 

the  range.  There  are  50  mils  upon  each  side  of  the  zero,  and  the 
scale  is  marked  from  left  to  right  as  follows : 

40  20  0  80  60 

the  actual  mils  being 

40  20  0  6380  6360 

thus  making  deflection  readings  on  this  sight  uniform  with  those  of 
the  panoramic  sight  and  the  battery  commander's  telescope.  The 
scale  has  a  short  longitudinal  adjustment  by  which  the  zero  of  the 
scale  may  be  located  so  as  to  bring  the  line  of  sight  parallel  to  the 
plane  containing  the  axis  of  gun. 

PANORAMIC    SIGHT,  MODEL    OF    1904. 

[PL  IX.] 

The  panoramic  sight  is  a  vertical  telescope  so  fitted  with  reflecting 
prisms  that  the  gunner  with  his  eyes  at  the  eyepiece,  which  is  fixed 
in  a  horizontal  position,  may  bring  into  the  field  of  view  an  object 
situated  at  any  point  in  a  plane  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the 
telescope. 

The  details  of  the  optical  part  of  this  instrument  are  shown  in 
Plate  IX,  and  comprise  the  rotating  head  prism  A,  the  rotating 
prism  B,  the  objective  lens  C,  the  lower  reflecting  prism  D,  and  the 
eyepiece  E.  The  rays  coming  Irom  the  object  are  reflected  down- 
ward from  the  prism  A  into  prism  B,  which  rectifies  them;  after 
their  passage  through  the  objective  lens  C,  the  prism  D  reflects  them 
in  such  a  way  that  there  is  presented  to  the  eyepiece  E  a  rectified 
image,  which  the  eyepiece  magnifies.  The  prism  B  is  of  rectangular 
cross  section.  Its  peculiarity  is  that  on  rotation  about  its  longi- 
tudinal axis  the  image  of  an  object  seen  through  it  turns  with  twice 
the  angular  velocity  of  the  prism.  As,  therefore,  the  prisms  A  and 
B  are  so  mounted  as  to  rotate  about  this  axis,  prism  B  following  A 
with  one-half  of  the  angular  velocity  of  the  latter,  the  image  always 
remains  as  it  would  appear  to  one  observing  it  directly  with  an 
ordinary  terrestrial  telescope. 

The  image  formed  by  the  objective  lens  would  naturally  be  reversed 
and  inverted.  The  lower  inclined  faces  of  the  prism  D  by  cross 
reflection  transfer  the  rays  to  opposite  sides  of  the  axis,  thus  cor- 
recting the  reversal.  The  correction  of  the  inversion  is  accom- 
plished by  the  combined  action  of  the  three  prisms  A,  B,  and  D,  the 
nature  of  the  action  varying  with  the  different  positions  of  the 
prisms.  In  the  position  shown  on  Plate  IX,  prisms  A  and  D  act  as 
parallel  reflectors,  and  they,  without  the  lens  system,  would  present 
an  erect  image.  Prism  B,  however,  inverts  the  rays  and  corrects 
61714—16 4 


50 

the  inversion  produced  by  the  objective  lens.  It  will  be  noted  the 
effect  would  be  the  same  whethsr  the  prism  B  occupies  the  position 
shown  on  the  plate  or  be  revolved  180°  from  that  position.  This 
latter  position  is  the  one  it  would  assume  if  the  prism  A  were  rotated 
through  360°.  If  the  prism  A  be  now  rotated  through  180°  the 
prisms  A  and  D  would  form  two  reflectors  set  at  right  angles,  and 
would  give,  without  the  lens  system,  an  inverted  image,  and  in  con- 
junction with  the  lens  system  an  erect  image.  Prism  B  in  this  case 
will  occupy  a  position  90°  from  that  shown  on  the  plate,  in  which 
position  it  causes  no  inversion,  but  counteracts  the  inversion  pro- 
duced by  prism  D. 

A  glass  reticule  marked  with  crosslines  is  located  in  the  focal  plane 
of  the  instrument,  with  the  intersection  of  the  crosslines  coincident 
with  its  optical  axis.  No  provision  is  made  for  changing  the  focus 
of  eyepiece  or  objective  lens.  As  issued,  the  instrument  is  focused 
for  the  usual  range  and  the  average  eye.  The  magnifying  power  of 
the  instrument  is  four;  the  field  of  view  is  10°. 

The  mechanical  construction  of  the  instrument  is  as  follows:  The 
body  consists  of  a  shank,  provided  on  its  front  surface  with  a  T  lug 
which  fits  into  a  corresponding  slot  in  the  head  of  the  sight  shank 
and  is  held  in  that  position  on  sights  by  a  detent  ratchet,  and  ciamp 
screw.  To  the  lower  end  of  the  shank  is  screwed  the  eyepiece  elbow, 
forming  a  housing  for  the  prism  D  and  the  eyepiece  E.  To  the  upper 
end  of  the  shank  is  screwed  the  azimuth-circle  support,  to  which  is 
screwed  the  hood  for  the  azimuth  circle,  forming  a  seat  for  the  rotating 
mechanism  of  the  sight.  The  opening  in  the  rotating  head  is  closed 
by  the  rotating-head  glass  window,  which  forms  a  dust  guard.  The 
rotating-head  prism  A  is  mounted  opposite  this  opening.  The  lower 
end  of  the  rotating  head  is  seated  in  the  azimuth-circle  hub  and  gear. 
A  worm  located  in  worm  box  in  the  hood  for  azimuth  circle  engages 
in  a  worm  gear  cut  on  the  azimuth  circle. 

The  worm  is  pivoted  at  its  rear  end  in  the  worm  box  by  a  ball-and- 
socket  bearing.  This  bearing  consists  of  the  bearing-socket  worm 
ball  and  bearing  cap. 

The  worm-throw-out  mechanism  consists  of  the  draw  pin,  draw-pin 
spring,  spring-retaining  nut,  and  lever. 

The  rotating  prism  B  is  secured  in  the  upper  end  and  the  objective 
C  in  the  lower  end  of  the  supporting  sleeve  for  rotating  prism  resting 
in  the  hub  and  gear.  The  upper  end  of  this  supporting  sleeve  for  the 
rotating  prism  and  the  lower  end  of  the  azimuth  circle  have  gears 
which  engage  in  a  double  pinion  seated  in  the  azimuth-circle  support. 
The  gears  and  pinions  are  calculated  so  that  the  angular  velocity  of 
the  rotating  head  is  twice  that  of  the  rotating  prism  B  and  is  in  the 
same  direction.  The  motion  of  rotation  is  transmitted  from  the  worm 
to  the  azimuth  circle,  thence  to  the  azimuth-circle  hub  and  gear,  thence 


51 

to  the  pinion  and  through  it  to  the  supporting  sleeve  for  rotating 
prism.  The  amount  of  motion  of  the  rotating-head  prism  is  indicated 
by  a  graduated  scale  on  the  perimeter  of  the  azimuth  circle,  visible 
through  the  glass  azimuth  window  in  the  rear  face  of  the  hood  for  the 
azimuth  circle.  The  zero  of  the  scale  and  the  index  on  the  head- 
piece are  located  so  that  the  line  of  sight  of  the  panoramic  sight  is 
parallel  to  that  of  the  axis  of  the  gun  when  set  at  0  elevation  and 
deflection. 

The  scale  is  formed  by  dividing  the  circumference  into  64  equal 
parts.  One  complete  turn  of  the  worm  moves  the  rotating-head 
prism  through  one  of  these  divisions,  or  -^  of  a  circle.  The  rear  end 
of  the  worm  carries  the  azimuth  micrometer  knob  with  circumference 
graduated  into  100  equal  parts  to  form  a  micrometer  scale.  One  of 
these  subdivisions,  therefore,  equals  -j-J^  of  a  division  of  the  main 
scale,  or  marks  a  movement  of  the  rotating-head  prism  and  line  of 
sight  through  6£00  of  a  circle.  An  angular  movement  of  the  line  of 
sight  through  g-^-  of  a  circle  corresponds  very  closely  to  a  lateral 
displacement  of  1Q100  of  the  range.  Practically  the  subdivisions  of 
the  deflection  scale  on  the  panoramic  sight  are  considered  as  points 
equal  to  10100  of  the  range  and  are  called  milliemes  or  mils. 

The  reading  of  the  deflection  scale  or  the  size  of  an  angle  is  given  in 
units  of  the  micrometer  scale  as  2763,  1521,  etc.,  meaning  fjfj,  Ufo-, 
etc.,  of  360°.  The  alternate  divisions  of  the  main  scale  are  numbered 
in  a  clockwise  direction  0,  2,  4,  etc.,  to  62,  inclusive.  In  reading  the 
deflection  scale,  therefore,  hundreds  are  read  directly  from  the  main 
scales  and  tens  and  units  from  the  deflection-screw  micrometer  scale. 
At  0  the  line  of  sight  is  parallel  to  the  vertical  plane  through  the  axis 
of  the  gun;  at  16  (or  1,600  mils)  it  is  perpendicular  to  that  plane  and 
pointing  directly  to  the  right,,  etc. 

The  azimuth  micrometer  knob  is  secured  on  the  rear  end  of  the 
worm  by  a  locking  screw.  This  arrangement  permits  the  0  of  the 
scale  to  be  set  opposite  the  index  line  on  the  azimuth  micrometer 
index  without  movement  of  the  worm  in  adjusting  the  sight. 

The  worm  which  is  seated  at  its  front  end  in  the  draw  pin  is  held  in 
contact  with  the  worm  gear  on  the  azimuth  circle  by  the  draw-pin 
spring,  and  is  arranged  so  that  it  may  be  disengaged  from  the  worm 
gear  by  movement  of  a  lever.  When  disengaged,  the  line  of  sight 
may  be  rapidly  oriented  to  approximately  the  desired  direction,  the 
worm  then  thrown  into  gear,  and  finer  adjustments  made  by  turning 
the  azimuth  micrometer  knob. 

All  panoramic  sights  have  been  made  interchangeable,  so  as  to  fit 
in  seats. 

The  following  device  for  illumination  of  the  cross  lines  of  the  reticule 
of  panoramic  sights  is  used. 


52 

A  small  slit  is  cut  in  the  eyepiece  elbow  and  the  reticule  cell  on  the 
side  of  the  sight  next  the  gun.  A  shutter  is  provided  which  encircles 
the  eyepiece  elbow  opposite  the  slit,  affording  means  for  closing.  On 
some  sights  this  shutter  is  provided  with  a  transparent  celluloid  win- 
dow to  prevent  the  entrance  of  dust.  On  the  later  sights  a  glass 
window  is  fitted  in  the  side  of  the  eyepiece.  Eor  illumination  at 
night  electric  flash  lights  are  used.  They  should  be  held  close  to  the 
illuminating  slot  or  window. 

PANOEAMIC    SIGHT,    MODEL    OF    1915. 

[Plate  X.] 

X 

The  panoramic  sight  is  a  vertical  telescope  so  fitted  with  an  optical 
system  of  reflecting  prisms  and  lenses  that  the  gunner  with  his  eye 
at  the  fixed  eyepiece  in  a  horizontal  position  can  bring  into  the  field 
of  view  an  object  situated  at  any  point  in  a  plane  perpendicular  to 
the  axis  of  the  telescope. 

The  rays  coming  from  the  object  are  reflected  downward  from  the 
rotating  head  prism  into  the  rotating  prism.  The  rotating  prism 
rectifies  the  rays;  after  their  passage  through  the  achromatic  objective 
lens,  the  lower  reflecting  prism  reflects  them  in  such  a  way  that  there 
is  presented  to  the  eyepiece  a  rectified  image,  which  the  eyepiece 
magnifies.  The  peculiarity  of  the  rotating  prism  is  that  upon  rota- 
tion about  its  longitudinal  axis  the  image  of  the  object  seen  through 
it  turns  with  twice  the  angular  velocity  of  the  rotating  prism.  The 
rotating  head  prism  and  rotating  prism  are  so  mounted  as  to  rotate 
about  this  axis;  the  rotating  prism  following  the  rotating  head  prism 
with  one-half  of  the  angular  velocity  of  the  latter,  the  image  always 
remains  as  it  would  appear  to  one  observing  it  directly  with  an 
ordinary  telescope.  The  image  formed  by  the  achromatic  objective 
lens  would  then  be  reversed  and  inverted.  The  rays  are  cross  re- 
flected to  the  opposite  sides  of  the  axis  by  the  inclined  faces  of  the 
lower  reflecting  prism,  thus  correcting  the  reversal. 

The  combined  action  of  the  rotating  head  prism,  the  rotating  prism 
and  lower  reflecting  prism  and  the  nature  of  action  varying  with 
different  positions  of  the  prisms  provide  for  the  correction  of  the 
inversion  of  the  image.  The  rotating  head  prism  and  lower  reflecting 
prism,  as  shown  in  position  on  Plate  X,  act  as  parallel  reflectors,  and 
they,  without  the  lens  system,  would  present  an  erect  image.  The 
rotating  prism,  however,  inverts  the  rays  and  corrects  the  inversion 
produced  by  the  achromatic  objective  lens.  It  will  be  noted  that 

e^effect  would  be  the  same  whether  the  rotating  prism  occupies 
the  same'position  shown  on  the  plate  or  be  revolved  180°  from  that 
position.  The  rotating  head  prism  must  be  turned  through  360°  to 
get  a  position  of  180°  for  the  rotating  prism.  If  the  rotating  head 


53 

prism  is  rotated  through  180°,  the  rotating  prism  and  lower  reflecting 
prism  would  form  reflectors  set  at  right  angles,  and  would  give, 
without  the  lens  system,  an  inverted  image,  and  in  conjunction  with 
the  lens  system  an  erect  image.  The  rotating  prism  in  this  case  will 
occupy  a  position  90°  from  that  shown  on  the  plate,  in  which  position 
it  causes  no  inversion  but  counteracts  the  inversion  produced  by  the 
lower  reflecting  prism. 

The  instrument  has  a  magnifying  power  of  4  and  a  field  of  view 
of  10°. 

The  principal  parts  of  the  panoramic  sight  are  the  rotating  head 
mechanism,  the  elevation  device,  the  azimuth  mechanism,  the  rotat- 
ing prism  mechanism,  the  deflection  mechanism,  the  shank,  and  the 
eyepiece. 

The  rotating  head  mechanism  consists  principally  of  the  rotating 
head,  rotating  head  prism,  rotating  head  prism  holder,  prism-holder 
cover,  elevation  index  support,  'prism  shield,  and  rotating  head 
cover. 

The  rotating  head  forms  a  housing  for  its  movable  parts,  and  pro- 
vides seats  for  the  elevation  worm  bushing  and  rotating  head  prism 
holder.  The  front  opening  of  the  rotating  head  is  closed  by  the 
prism  shield  which  forms  a  dust  guard.  The  bottom  threaded  seat 
of  the  rotating  head  screws  upon  the  upper  end  of  the  azimuth  worm 
wheel  and  is  locked  in  place  by  four  azimuth  scale  retaining  ring 
screws.  Upon  the  rear  face  of  the  rotating  head  is  engraved  a  scale 
which  is  used  for  measuring  the  elevation  of  the  rotating  head  prism 
holder  which  retains  the  rotating  head  prism  and  has  an  index  mark 
upon  the  projection  which  coincides  with  the  graduations  of  the 
elevation  worm  micrometer  head. 

The  rotating  head  prism  is  mounted  within  the  rotating  head 
prism  holder  between  the  prism  support  front,  prism  support  bottom, 
and  prism  support  back,  and  secured  in  position  by  the  rotating  head 
prism  spring  wrhich  bears  upon  the  prism  support  back.  The  rotating 
head  prism  is  protected  on  the  right  side  by  the  prism-holder  cover 
and  on  the  left  side  by  the  elevation  index  support. 

The  prism  shield  is  held  within  the  rotating  head  by  the  prism 
shield  retaining  piece,  which  is  in  turn  secured  by  two  prism  shield 
retaining  piece  screws. 

The  prism-holder  cover  screws  into  its  threaded  seat  located  in  the 
right  side  of  the  rotating  head  prism  holder  and  locked  in  position 
by  the  prism-holder  cover  screws. 

The  rotating  head  cover  screws  into  its  threaded  seat  located  in 
the  right  side  of  the  rotating  head  and  held  in  place  by  the  rotating 
head  cover  screws.  The  exterior  of  the  rotating  head  cover  has  two 
small  holes  for  teat  wrench,  and  engravings  "Field  10°"  and  "Power 
4"  are  located  on  the  exterior  surface. 


54 

The  elevation-index  support  screws  into  its  threaded  seat  located 
in  the  left  side  of  the  rotating  head  prism  holder  and  secured  in 
place  by  the  elevation-index  support  screw.  The  small  holes  in 
ihe  exterior  surface  allows  the  use  of  teat  wrench  to  enable  the  ele- 
vation-index support  to  be  screwed  in  place.  The  support-retain- 
ing ring  retains  the  elevation-index  support  with  rotating  head 
prism  holder  within  the  rotating  head  and  is  locked  in  position  by 
the  support-retaining  ring  screw. 

The  elevation  index  is  held  upon  the  elevation-index  support  by 
the  two  elevation-index  retaining  screws.  The  arrow,  engraved 
upon  the  German-silver  piece,  which  is  dovetailed  in  the  elevation 
index,  coincides  with  the  graduations  of  the  scale  engraved  upon 
the  rear  face  of  the  rotating  head. 

The"  elevation  device  consists  principally  of  the  elevation  segment, 
elevation  worm,  elevation-worm  bushing,  elevation-worm  retaining 
nut,  and  elevation-worm  micrometer  head. 

The  elevation  segment  is  held  in  its  seat,  provided  in  the  rotating 
head  prism  holder,  by  the  segment  lock  pin.  The  movement  of 
the  elevation  segment  is  limited  between  two  dowel  pins,  which  are 
driven  through  the  rotating  head. 

The  elevation  worm  is  mounted  eccentrically  within  the  elevation- 
worm  bushing,  which  when  turned  provides  an  adjustment  to  take 
up  the  wear  between  the  worm  threads  and  the  worm  teeth  of  the 
elevation  segment. 

The  elevation-worm  bushing  has  a  screw-driver  slot  in  its  lower 
end,  which  is  used  for  adjusting  and  is  retained  in  position  by  the 
elevation-worm  bushing  clamp  plug,  which  is  secured  by  the  bush- 
ing clamp  plug  screw. 

The  elevation-worm  retaining  nut  retains  the  elevation-worm 
bushing  and  elevation  worm  lengthwise  within  the  rotating  head. 
The  screw-driver  slot,  in  the  top  of  the  elevation-worm  retaining 
nut,  is  used  for  adjusting  and  is  locked  in  position  by  the  elevation- 
worm  retaining  nut  screw. 

The  elevation-worm  micrometer  head  is  held  upon  the  upper 
slotted  end  of  the  elevation  worm  by  the  locking  screw.  The  scale, 
engraved  upon  the  periphery,  is  graduated  into  100  equal  divisions, 
numbered  every  10  divisions.  The  upper  exterior  diameter  of  the 
elevation-worm  micrometer  head-  is  straight  knurled  to  facilitate 
turning.  One  complete  revolution  of  the  elevation-worm  microme- 
ter head  is  equal  to  the  distance  between  each  graduation  upon  the 
scale  on  the  rear  face  of  the  rotating  head. 

The  open  sight  is  constructed  of  bronze  plate,  bent  to  shape, 
having  an  arm  projecting  out  at  each  end,  each  arm  containing  a 
hole.  A  bronze  knee  is  soldered  to  the  interior  of  the  front  project- 


ing  arm  over  the  center  of  the  hole  in  such  a  manner  to  form  a  sight 
which  is  used  for  quick  sighting.  The  open  sight  is  secured  to  the 
rotating  head  cover  by  two  open-sight  retaining  screws. 

The  principle  parts  of  the  azimuth  mechanism  are  the  azimuth 
worm  wheel,  azimuth  worm  wheel  support,  azimuth  worm  wheel 
cover,  azimuth  worm,  azimuth  worm  ball,  throw-out  cam,  throw- 
out  plunger,  azimuth  micrometer  knob,  and  azimuth  scale. 

The  azimuth  scale  is  retained  upon  its  bearings,  provided  on 
lower  end  of  the  rotating  head,  by  the  azimuth-scale  retaining  ring, 
which  in  turn  is  secured  by  four  azimuth-scale  retaining  ring  screws. 
The  four  elongated  holes  in  the  azimuth  scale  provide  for  adjusting. 
The  scale,  engraved  upon  the  lower,  exterior  diameter,  is  graduated 
into  64  equal  divisions,  numbered  every  two  divisions. 

The  azimuth  worm  wheel  cover  forms  a  housing  for  the  movable 
parts  of  the  azimuth  mechanism  and  provides  seats  for  the  ball  and 
socket  bearing  throw-out  mechanism  and  deflection  worm  wheel 
and  support  ring.  The  arrow,  engraved  upon  the  upper  exterior 
diameter  of  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  cover,  coincides  with  the  gradu- 
ations of  the  azimuth  scale.  The  scale  engraved  upon  a  boss  on  the 
rear  face  of  the  azimuth-worm  wheel  cover  is  used  for  measuring  the 
deflection  of  the  object.  The  arrow,  engraved  upon  the  offset  on 
the  rear  right  side  of  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  cover,  coincides  with 
the  graduations  on  the  azimuth  micrometer  knob. 

The  felt  washer  which  is  retained  in  its  seat,  is  located  in  the  upper 
end  of  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  cover,  provides  for  sufficient  friction 
between  the  rotating  head  and  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  cover. 

The  azimuth  worm  wheel  support  spring  tends  to  retain  the  azi- 
muth worm  wheel  upon  the  azimuth-worm  wheel  support. 

The  gear  teeth  of  the  lower  part  of  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  mesh 
with  the  rotating  head  pinion,  which  upon  rotation  moves  the 
rotating  head  mechanism.  The  lower  part  of  the  azimuth  worm  wheel 
support  screws  into  its  threaded  seat  provided  in  the  upper  part  of 
the  shank. 

The  azimuth  worm  is  provided  at  one  end  with  an  azimuth  worm 
ball,  held  in  place  by  a  bearing  cap  and  bearing  socket.  A  clearance 
space  is  provided  so  that  the  bearing  cap  can  be  adjusted  to  take  up 
wear.  A  throw-out  plunger  with  a  spring  and  spring  retaining  nut, 
is  provided  for  compensating  for  wear  between  the  azimuth  worm 
and  azimuth  worm  wheel.  A  throw-out  lever  which  is  pinned  to  a 
throw-out  cam,  which  in  turning  acts  on  the  throw-out  plunger,  is 
a  means  provided  for  disengaging  the  azimuth  worm  and  azimuth 
worm  wheel.  The  azimuth  micrometer  knob  is  held  on  the  slotted 
end  of  the  azimuth  worm  by  the  locking  screw.  The  scale  is  divided 
into  100  equal  divisions,  numbered  every  5  divisions.  One  complete 


56 

revolution  of  the  azimuth  micrometer  knob  is  equal  to  the  distance 
between  each  graduation  on  the  azimuth  scale. 

The  rotating  prism  mechanism  consists  principally  of  the  rotating 
prism,  rotating  prism  holder,  rotating  prism  supporting  sleeve, 
rotating  prism  pinion,  and  rotating  prism  block. 

The  rotating  prism  is  of  rectangular  cross  section,  mounted  and 
retained  in  position  within  the  rotating  prism  holder  by  rotating 
prism  block  which  is  secured  by  the  rotating  prism  set  screw.  The 
rotating  prism  holder  is  seated  in  the  upper  section  of  the  rotating 
prism  supporting  sleeve.  The  rotating  prism  pinion  is  driven  upon 
the  pinion  shaft.  The  rotating  head  pinion  is  driven  upon  the  hub 
of  the  rotating  prism  pinion.  The  pinion  shaft  is  mounted  at  both 
ends  in  its  seat  provided  in  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  support  which 
upon  rotation,  moves  the  pinion  shaft.  This  gear  system  is  so 
designed  that  the  rotating  head  moves  twice  the  angular  distance  of 
the  rotating  prism  holder. 

The  principal  parts  of  the  deflection  mechanism  are  the  deflection 
worm  wheel  and  support  ring,  deflection  worm,  deflection  worm 
bushing,  deflection  dial,  and  deflection  worm  knob. 

The  deflection  worm  wheel  and  support  ring  is  seated  within  the 
azimuth  worm  wheel  cover  located  by  two  dowel  pins,  and  then 
retained  by  six  deflection  worm  wheel  and  support  ring  screws.  A 
segment,  projecting  downward  into  the  shank,  carries  a  worm  wheel 
which  meshes  with  the  deflection  worm.  The  deflection  worm  wheel 
support  is  located  within  the  shank  and  against  the  deflection  worm 
wheel  and  support  ring  by  two  dowel  pins,  and  secured  by  two 
deflection  worm  wheel  support  screws. 

The  deflection  worm  is  mounted  eccentrically  within  the  deflection 
worm  bushing  which  when  turned  provides  an  adjustment  to  take 
up  the  wear  between  the  worm  threads  and  the  worm  teeth  of  the 
deflection  worm  wheel  and  support  ring. 

The  deflection  worm  bushing  is  adjusted  by  using  the  fingers  upon 
rear  end  and  is  restrained  in  position  by  the  deflection  worm  bushing 
clamp  plug,  which  is  secured  by  the  deflection  worm  bushing  clamp- 
plug  screw.  A  German  silver  piece  is  pinned  and  soldered  to  the 
rear  end  of  the  deflection  worm  bushing  on  which  is  engraved  three 
arrows  with  letters  "R"  and  "L."  The  middle  or  large  arrow 
coincides  with  the  graduations  of  the  deflection  dial.  The  com- 
pensating spring  is  provided  for  taking  up  all  lost  motion  that  appears 
lengthwise  in  the  mechanism.  The  worm  knob  is  secured  to  the  de- 
flection worm  by  a  taper  pin;  the  periphery  being  straight  knurled 
to  facilitate  turning.  The  deflection  dial  is  held  on  the  front  slotted 
end  of  the  deflection  worm  by  the  locking  screw.  The  scale  engraved 
upon  the  front  end  is  graduated  into  100  equal  divisions,  numbered 


57 

every  10  divisions.  The  shank  forms  a  body  for  the  instrument  and 
provides  seats  for  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  support,  deflection  worm 
bushing  and  elbow.  The  front  surface  is  provided  with  a  T  lug 
which  fits  into  a  corresponding  slot  in  the  upper  end  of  the  shank  of 
the  rear  sight.  Upon  the  rear  surface  is  dovetailed  the  deflection 
index  which  is  retained  in  place  by  the  deflection  index  screw. 

The  arrow,  engraved  upon  the  deflection  index,  coincides  with 
graduation  on  the  rear  face  of  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  cover. 

The  eyepiece  consists  principally  of  the  reticule,  the  reticule  cell, 
achromatic  field  lens,  achromatic  eyelens,  and  eyelens  cell. 

The  achromatic  objective  lens  is  mounted  in  the  upper  end  of  the 
objective  lens  cell.  This  cell  is  secured  in  its  threaded  seat  in  the 
upper  end  of  the  elbow  by  two  objective  lens  cell  retaining  screws. 

The  elbow  is  secured  in  the  lower  end  of  the  shank  and  secured  by 
the  four  elbow  retaining  screws  in  such  a  manner  that  its  projecting 
arm  is  horizontal  to  the  axis  of  the  instruments.  The  elbow  provides 
seats  for  the  lower  reflecting  prism  and  the  eyelens  cell.  The  lower 
reflecting  prism  is  held  upon  its  bearing  surfaces,  provided  in  the 
elbow  by  two  wedges  which  in  turn  are  secured  by  the  two  wedge 
screws.  These  screws  are  retained  by  the  wedge  screw  lock  screw. 
The  wedge  screw  cover  is  provided  to  retain  the  wedge  screw  lock 
screws  in  position.  The  wedge  screw  cover  is  secured  by  the  wedge 
cover  screw.  The  opening  of  the  elbow  upon  the  right  and  left  sides 
are  closed  by  the  elbow  covers,  which  are  locked  by  the  elbow  cover 
screws.  Upon  the  left  side  of  the  elbow  is  an  opening  through  which 
the  light  is  thrown  upon  the  reticule.  This  opening  is  covered  by 
the  window  to  protect  the  interior  of  the  eyepiece  from  dust  and  dirt. 
The  shutter  is  so  designed  to  slide  over  the  opening  in  the  elbow 
being  guided  by  the  shutter  stop  screw  and  movement  limited  by 
the  elongated  slot. 

The  reticule  has  two  crosslines  etched  on  its  surface  and  is  mounted 
in  the  forward  end  to  the  reticule  cell  which  is  secured  in  the  eyelens 
cell  by  the  reticule  cell  retaining  screw. 

The  achromatic  eyelens  is  mounted  in  the  eyelens  cell  and  is 
separated  from  the  achromatic  field  lens  by  the  lens  separator.  The 
achromatic  field  lens  is  held  within  the  eyelens  cell  by  the  field  lens 
retaining  ring,  which  in  turn  is  locked  by  the  field  lens  cell  retaining 
ring  screw.  The  eyelens  cell  is  secured  to  the  elbow  by  the  eyelens 
cell  retaining  screw. 

All  interior  metallic  surfaces  exposed  to  the  refracted  light  are 
finished  with  dull  black  baking  enamel.  All  exposed  optical  ele- 
ments, covers,  and  nonrotating  joints  are  sealed  with  the  litharge 
cement  or  equal.  All  German  silver  graduated  surfaces  are  sand- 
blasted and  lacquered. 


58 

USE    OF    THE    OPEN    SIGHT    AND    PANORAMIC    SIGHT. 

For  direct  aiming. — Set  the  rear  sight  at  the  required  elevation; 
correct  for  difference  of  level  of  wheels;  set  off  deflection  ordered; 
elevate  the  gun  and  traverse  the  carriage  until  the  crosslines  of  the 
peep  sight  are  on  the  target. 

PANORAMIC    SIGHTS,  MODELS    OF    1904   AND    1915. 

For  direct  aiming. — Set  the  rear  sight  at  the  required  elevation  and 
correct  for  difference  of  level  of  wheels;  set  off  the  desired  deflection 
on  the  azimuth  circle  of  the  panoramic  sight;  bring  the  crosslines  of 
the  sight  upon  the  target  by  means  of  the  elevating  and  traversing 
devices  of  the  carriage. 

In  using  the  model  of  1915  sight  for  direct  fire,  care  must  be  taken  that 
the  rotating  head  be  set  at  300  mils  and  the  deflection  mechanism  at  0. 

F.or  indirect  aiming. — Set  the  sight  shank  at  the  required  range  and 
correct  for  difference  of  level  of  wheels.  Set  the  azimuth  scale  of  the 
panoramic  sight  at  the  deflection  ordered.  By  means  of  the  microm- 
eter screw,  set  the  movable  level  until  the  reading  on  it  is  equal  to 
the  angle  of  site  ordered.  By  means  of  the  elevating  han awheel  of 
the  carriage  and  by  traversing  the  carriage  on  the  ground,  manipulate 
until  the  bubble  in  the  movable  level  is  centered  and  until  the  vertical 
cross  wire  in  the  panoramic  sight  is  on  the  aiming  point. 

For  measuring  ranges. — Distances  or  ranges  may  be  roughly  cal- 
culated from  readings  made  by  two  panoramic  sights  mounted  on 
their  guns,  as  follows: 

Direct  the  guns  on  the  target;  then  sight  the  panoramic  sights  on 
each  other.  The  angle  at  the  target  subtended  by  the  line  connecting 
the  two  guns  is  then  3,200  mils  minus  the  sum  of  the  actual  angles  in 
mils  measured  at  the  guns. 

If  B  is  the  distance  between  the  guns  in  yards,  then  range  equals 
B  multiplied  by  1,000  divided  by  the  number  of  mils  in  the  angle  at 
the  target. 

The  accuracy  of  this  method  increases  as  B  becomes  smaller  so 
long  as  the  instruments  can  be  read  correctly. 

CARE    OF    SIGHTS. 

Whenever  convenient,  and  especially  when  in  garrison  and  not  in 
use,  the  front  and  rear  sights  and  panoramic  sights  should  be  kept  in 
some  dry  place,  as  in  the  barracks7  storeroom  or  office. 

When  traveling  the  sight  bracket  with  shank  and  sight  complete 
is  removed  from  the  sight  bracket  base  and  placed  in  the  sight  case. 

All  parts  of  the  shanks  and  shank  sockets  should  be  kept  clean, 
free  from  rust,  and  lightly  oiled.  When  stored  or  not  used  for  short 
periods,  they  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned  and  well  coated  with 


59 

light  slushing  oil.  Should  any  part  become  rusted,  it  should  bo 
carefully  cleaned  by  softening  the  rust  with  coal  oil  and  rubbing 
with  a  soft-pine  stick. 

In  handling  all  parts  of  the  sights  care  must  be'  exercised  to  avoid 
injuring  them  by  dropping,  striking  them  upon  or  with  other  parts,, 
etc. 

To  clean  the  joint  between  the  sight  bracket  and  the  shank  socket, 
drive  out  the  taper  pin  from  the  end  of  the  leveling  screw  and  remove 
the  leveling  screw.  Disassemble  the  shank  socket  from  the  sight 
bracket,  clean  all  parts,  and  oil  thorn  with  sperm  oil.  Assemble  in 
the  reverse  order. 

Oil  the  leveling  screw  from  time  to  time. 

Extra  glass  level  vials  assembled  in  brass  tubes,  to  replace  broken 
vials  in  sights,  will  be  issued  on  requisition. 

Only  ordinary  tools,  such  as  a  hammer  and  a  punch  or  a  piece  ot 
wire,  are  required  for  the  removal  of  pins  from  level  caps  in  order  to- 
replace  vials.  All  pins  on  level  caps  are  driven  in  toward  the  center 
of  the  instrument.  They  should  be  driven  out  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion. Four  adjusting  screws  in  the  vial  tubes  are  used  for  adjusting 
the  tubes  in  their  holders. 

CARE    OF   THE   PANORAMIC    SIGHT,    MODELS    OF    1904    AND    1915. 

These  sights  are  delicate  instruments  and  must  not  be  subjected  to 
any  rough  usage,  jars,  or  strains.  In  firing  they  are  removed  from 
the  carriage ;  in  the  field,  when  not  in  use,  they  are  kept  in  the  sight 
case. 

To  obtain  satisfactory  vision,  the  glasses  must  be  perfectly  clean 
and  dry.  The  T  lug  on  the  sight  and  the  slot  forming  its  seat  should 
be  kept  lightly  oiled  as  a  preventive  of  rust.  The  worm  and  worm 
rack  should  be  oiled  with  vaseline.  When  dust  accumulates  on  the 
pointers,  it  should  be  removed  by  a  fine  camel's-hair  brush  in  the 
hands  of  an  experienced  person. 

To  disassemble  the  worm  mechanism  of  the  model  of  1904  sight  for 
cleaning,  throw  out  the  worm-box  eccentric  lever,  disengaging  the 
worm  from  the  worm  gear  of  the  azimuth  circle.  Insert  a  pin  in  the 
radial  hole  in  the  spring-box  pin.  Throw  the  worm-box  eccentric 
lever  back  and  engage  the  worm  in  the  azimuth  circle.  Push  the 
spring  box  toward  the  worm  knob  about  three-eighths  inch  and  then 
lift  it  straight  out.  Take  out  the  eccentric-lever  stud  and  remove  the 
worm-box  eccentric  lever.  Pull  out  the  dowel  in  the  worm-box  pin 
with  a  pair  of  pliers  and  drive  out  the  worm-box  pin.  Then  pull  out 
the  worm  box  and  worm  complete.  The  worm  may  be  cleaned 
without  further  disassembling.  Assemble  in  reverse  order. 

Tho  teeth  of  the  worm  wheel  may  be  cleaned  without  disassembling 
the  hood. 


60 

To  clean  the  rofcating-haad  window  and  the  front  face  of  the 
rotating-haad  prism,  unscrew  the  window  cell  in  the  rotating  head. 
Do  not  remove  the  rotating-head  window  from  the  window  cell. 

To  clean  the  reticule  and  eyepiece  lenses,  remove  the  screw  holding 
the  eyepiece  to  the  eyepiece  elbow  and  unscrew  the  eyepiece.  To 
disassemble  the  lenses,  remove  the  set  screw  on  the  under  side  of  the 
eyepiece  and  unscrew  the  eye-lens  cell.  The  field  lens  is  held  in 
place  by  a  retaining  spring,  both  of  which  may  drop  out  as  soon  as 
the  eye-lens  cell  is  disassembled. 

In  assembling  note  that  the  flat  surface  of  the  field  lens  of  the 
eyepiece  is  placed  next  to  the  reticule.  Do  not  remove  or  change 
the  adjustment  of  the  reticule.  Its  rear  surface  may  be  cleaned 
with  a  earner s-hair  brush  after  the  eyepiece  has  been  removed. 

In  panoramic  sights  of  serial  numbers  after  No.  752,  the  exposed 
optical  elements  and  all  nonmoving  joints  are  sealed,  and  no  attempt 
should  be  made  to  remove  them. 

For  serial  numbers  873  and  up,  the  slight  change  in  the  appearance 
and  construction  of  the  elbow  and  rotating  head  is  made  for  the 
purpose  of  making  these  parts  dust  and  moisture  proof. 

ADJUSTMENT    OP    SIGHTS. 

The  sights  are  correctly  adjusted  when  at  zero  elevation  and  deflec- 
tion the  line  of  sight  is  parallel  to  the  axis  of  bore. 

The  movable  level  is  correctly  adjusted  when  with  the  sight  shank 
set  at  zero,  level  scale  at  300,  the  axis  of  the  gun  horizontal,  and, 
when  corrected  for  difference  of  wheel,  the  bubble  of  the  movable 
level  stands  in  the  center  of  its  vial.  In  adjusting  sights,  the  pano- 
ramic sight  should  be  corrected  first. 

To  adjust  the  rear  (open  sight)  proceed  as  follows: 

With  the  sight  shank  set  at  zero,  the  direction  of  the  line  of  sight 
is  changed  by  means  of  the  peep-sight  screw  and  by  altering  the  front 
sight  until  it  is  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore.  The  method  of 
determining  when  this  condition  exists  is  given  below.  The  deflection 
scale  on  the  peep-sight  support  is  then  shifted  and  the  micrometer 
head  on  the  peep-sight  screw  moved  until  everything  reads  zero. 
The  movement  of  the  deflection  scale  is  provided  for  by  elongated 
holes  in  the  deflection  scale  through  which  pass  the  screws  which 
clamp  it  in  position  to  the  peep-sight  support.  Movement  of  the 
front  sight  is  accomplished  by  turning  the  holder  sleeve  after  first 
removing  the  split  pin. 

To  adjust  the  movable  level:  With  the  bore  of  the  piece  horizontal 
and  the  sight  set  at  zero  elevation,  the  position  of  the  level  holder  is 
changed  by  the  level  screw  until  the  bubble  is  in  the  center  of  its  vial. 
The  nut  inside  the  level  handle  which  clamps  the  graduated  disk  is 
then  released  and  the  disk  rotated  until  zero  comes  opposite  its  index. 


61 

TO    ADJUST    THE    PANORAMIC    SIGHT,  MODEL    OF    1915. 

Should  backlash  or  lost  motion  appear  lengthwise  in  the  elevation 
device,  it  can  b 3  removed  by  loosening  the  elevation-worm  retaining- 
nut  screw,  setting  up  on  the  elevation-worm  retaining  nut  and  then 
tightening  up  on  the  elevation-worm  retaining-nut  scrow.  To  remove 
backlash  between  the  threads  of  the  elevation  worm  and  worm  teeth 
of  the  elevation  segment,  loosen  the  bushing  clamp  plug  screw  which 
releases  the  elevation-worm  bushing  clamp  plug,  and  then  turning  the 
elevation  bushing,  in  which  the  elevation  worm  is  eccentrically 
mounted,  so  as  to  bring  the  elevation  worm  closer  in  contact  with  the 
worm  teeth  of  the  elevation  segment.  The  elevation-worm  adjusting 
clamp  plug  must  be  firmly  clamped  after  adjusting  by  tightening  up 
on  the  bushing  clamp  plug  screw  to  secure  the  elevation-worm  bush- 
ing against  rotation.  After  adjusting,  should  the  zero  upon  the 
elevation-worm  micrometer  head  not  coincide  with  its  index  when  the 
elevation  index  coincides  with  the  graduations  of  the  scale  upon  the 
rear  face  of  the  rotating  head,  it  can  be  easily  remedied  by  loosening 
the  locking  screw  and  turning  the  elevation-worm  micrometer  head 
until  the  zero  just  coincides  with  its  index,  after  which  it  must  be 
firmly  secured  by  tightening  the  locking  screw. 

Backlash  which  may  occur  between  the  threads  of  the  azimuth 
worm  and  the  worm  teeth  of  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  is  taken  up 
automatically  by  the  spring  that  forces  the  throw-out  plunger  which 
seats  the  azimuth  at  its  left  end  in  toward  the  azimuth  worm  wheel. 
The  four  elongated  holes  in  the  azimuth  scale  afford  means  for  ad- 
justing when  its  zero  does  not  coincide  with  the  arrow  head  upon  the 
upper  exterior  diameter  of  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  cover  when  the 
zero  of  the  deflection  scale,  upon  the  rear  of  the  azimuth  worm-wheel 
cover,  coincides  with  arrowhead  upon  the  deflection  index.  After 
this  adjustment  is  made  the  azimuth  micrometer  knob  should  be 
inspected  similar  to  that  elevation-worm  micrometer  head. 

Backlash  that  appears  between  the  threads  of  th.3  deflection  worm 
and  the  worm  teeth  of  the  deflection  worm  wheel  and  support  ring 
can  readily  be  removed  when  the  method  of  adjusting  similar  to  that 
of  the  elevation  device  is  followed  out. 

TO    ADJUST   THE    PANORAMIC    SIGHT,  MODEL    OF    1904. 

Direct  the  panoramic  sight  by  means  of  the 'azimuth  micrometer 
knob  and  rear  sight  scroll  gear  until  its  line  of  sight  is  parallel  to  the 
axis  of  the  bore.  The  method  of  determining  when  this  condition 
of  parallelism  exists  is  described  hereafter.  Without  disturbing  the 
direction  of  this  line  of  sight  move  the  azimuth  micrometer  knob  of 
panoramic  sight  and  the  range  strip  of  the  rear  sight  until  ths  zero 


62 

marks  come  opposite  their  respective  indices.  The  azimuth  microm- 
eter knob  may  be  moved  after  loosening  the  locking  screw  in  the  end 
of  the  worm.  This  locking  screw  may  be  loosened  by  the  combined 
teat  wrench  and  screw  driver  issued  for  the  purpose.  If  the  azimuth 
micrometer  knob  can  not  be  readily  removed,  grasp  the  sight  by  the 
azimuth  micrometer  knob,  release  the  worm  from  the  worm  gear  of 
the  azimuth  circle,  and  gently  tap  the  exposed  end  of  the  worm  with 
a  small  piece  of  wood  or  soft  metal. 

To  locate  the  index  opposite  the  zero  ,of  the  scale  loosen  the  four 
screws  that  hold  the  movable  index  cover  in  place  and  move  this 
cover  until  the  index  is  properly  located;  then  tighten  the  screws. 
Movement  of  the  range  strip  of  the  rear  sight  is  made  possible  by  a 
slot  in  the  shank  in  which  the  range  strip  screw  can  be  moved  when 
the  nut  has  been  loosened. 

VERIFICATION  OF  PARALLELISM  OF  LINES  OF  SIGHT  AND  AXIS  OF  BORE. 

The  adjustment  of  the  sights  is  of  such  importance  and  should  be 
verified  so  frequently  that  battery  commanders  will  find  it  advan- 
tageous to  make  permanent  arrangements  for  such  verification.  The 
leveled  supports  constituting  the  carriage  emplacement  should 
preferably  be  of  stone.  The  site  of  the  target  (fig.  1)  should  be 
prepared  and  the  exact  locations  of  the  target  and  horizontal  refer- 
ence points  permanently  marked.  If  these  arrangements  are  properly 
made,  subsequent  verifications  of  sights  will  become  a  simple  matter. 

A  target  of  dimensions  given  in  figure  1  is  placed  in  a  vertical 
position  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  sight,  at  such  a  height  that  the 
point  "bore"  is  at  the  same  height  as  the  axis  of  the  bore  of  the  gun. 
The  verticality  of  the  target  is  assured  by  a  plumb  line  attached  at  A, 
coinciding  with  the  vertical  line  AB. 

The  carriage  is  placed  with  the  wheels  and  trail  resting  upon  solid 
supports  of  wood  or  stone,  the  surfaces  of  which  have  been  carefully 
leveled  so  as  to  bring  the  axle  axis  horizontal.  Now  direct  the  gun 
so  that  the  prolongation  of  the  axis  of  the  bore,  as  determined  by  the 
bore  sights,  pierces  the  target  at  the  proper  point;  the  lines  of  sight 
of  the  open  and  panoramic  sights  are  then  adjusted  in  direction  by 
the  means  explained  above  until  they  pierce  the  targets  in  the  points 
marked,  respectively,  "open"  and  "panoramic." 

The  axis  of  the  bore  is  determined  and  prolonged  by  means  of  bore 
sights.  In  the  absence  of  such  means,  a  breech-bore  sight  may  be 
made  from  an  empty  cartridge  case  from  which  the  primer  has  been 
removed;  a  piece  of  paper  should  bs  pasted  over  the  primer  seat  and 
a  pinhole  made  in  its  exact  center  to  serve  as  a  peep  sight.  If  the 
cartridge  case  does  not  completely  fill  the  bore,  it  should  be  shimmed 
all  around  with  tissue  paper  until  it  does  so.  For  a  muzzle-bore 


63 


sight,  use  should  be  made  of  the  traces  of  the  horizontal  and  vertical 
planes  containing  the  axis  of  the  bore,  which  are  marked  on  the 
muzzle  of  the  gun.  Fine  threads  or  hairs  stretched  across  the  muzzle 
to  coincide  with  these  lines  form  a  good  bore  sight,  and  the  ends  of 
such  threads  may  be  conveniently  fastened  to  a  cloth  strap  buckled 
around  the  muzzle  of  the  gun. 


=  d.375  fOX  PWOR/W/C  5/GHT  MODLL  Of '1904 
6.338 FOR  PANORAMIC  5/6HT  MODEL  OF  1915 


FIGURE  L 

In  the  field,  where  from  lack  of  time  or  proper  facilities  the  method 
just  given  can  not  be  followed,  the  adjustment  of  the  sights  may  be 
verified  by  bringing  the  lines  of  sight  at  zero  elevation  and  deflection 
to  bear  upon  some  sharply  defined  point  of  a  distant  object.  At 
such  a  range  (for  instance,  2,000  yards  or  more)  the  parallax  may  be 
neglected,  and  if  the  sights  are  correctly  adjusted  the  lines  of  sight 
and  the  prolongation  of  the  axis  of  the  bore  will  sensibly  pass  through 
the  selected  aiming  point. 

ADDITIONAL    TESTS. 

After  the  sights  are  adjusted  they  should  be  subjected  to  the  fol- 
lowing tests  to  insure  their  accuracy  at  extremes  of  elevation  and 
azimuth: 


64 

(a)  With  carriage  level  and  gun  and  sights  at  zero  elevation  and 
deflection,  the  lines  of  sight  and  axis  of  bore  prolonged  pierce  the 
target  (fig.  1)  in  the  proper  points. 

(6)  The  gun  is  then  moved  to  its  maximum  elevation;  as  the  sight 
elevation  is  altered,  the  lines  of  sight  should  follow  the  vertical  lines 
through  the  same  points  of  the  target  (fig.  1). 

By  construction  and  assemblage  the  sights,  if  correctly  adjusted, 
should  fulfill  the  above  conditions  with  substantial  accuracy.  If 
error  be  noted,  a  report  of  the  facts  in  the  case  with  the  cause,  if 
known,  should  be  made  to  the  ordnance  officer  charged  with  the 
repair  of  the  material  for  his  information  and  action. 

GENERAL    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    CARE    AND   PRESERVATION. 

Keep  all  optical  surfaces  clean. 

For  the  cleaning  of  optical  surfaces  use  only  the  materials  supplied 
by  the  Ordnance  Department  for  that  purpose. 

Do  not  use  on  optical  surfaces  any  cleaning  material  which  is  dirty 
or  covered  with  oil  or  dust. 

ADJUSTING    INSTRUMENTS. 

A  complete  detailed  description  of  the  method  of  disassembling 
and  adjusting  the  different  instruments  is  given  in  Ordnance  Office 
Pamphlet  No.  1795,  Instructions  for  the  Care,  Preservation,  Repair) 
and  Adjustment  of  Instruments  for  the  Fire-Control  Systems  for 
Coast  and  Field  Artillery.  Attention  is  invited  to  General  Orders 
No.  47,  War  Department,  March  24,  1905,  with  reference  to  the  care 
and  repair  of  panoramic  sights. 

No  disassembling  of  instruments  except  as  prescribed  herein  will 
be  permitted.     The  disassembling  of  telescopic  instruments  allowed 
herein,  must  be  done  only  in  the  presence  of  a  commissioned  officer. 
Disassembling  as  permitted  in  Pamphlet  1795  must  be  done  only  by. 
officers  or  employees  of  the  Ordnance  Department. 


Part  I  (c).— TOOLS  AND  ACCESSORIES  FOR  THE  GUN  AND 

CARRIAGE. 


The  tools  and  accessories  for  the  gun  and  carriage  are  listed  on 
page  91. 

A  description  of  some  of  these  articles  follows. 

BRAKE    ROPES. 

Each  brake  rope  consists  of  a  1-inch  rope  with  a  hook  at  one  end 
and  a  ring  at  the  other.  Each  rope  is  passed  through  the  shoe  handle 
and  between  the  lower  spokes  of  the  wheel  on  both  sides  of  the  carriage. 
The  hook  is  brought  from  the  inside  of  the  wheel  between  the  spokes 
and  engaged  in  the  ring,  after  which  the  rope  is  tightened  by  turning 
the  wheel  downward  to  the  rear.  With  the  wheels  thus  locked,  the 
friction  on  the  ground  diminishes  the  movement  of  the  carriage  on 
the  ground. 

BUFFER-SPRING    CASE. 

The  buffer-spring  case  is  a  cylindrical  pouch  of  leather  with  a  flap 
cover.  A  single  loop  of  leather  or  strap  keeper  is  riveted  on  the  case, 
through  which  is  passed  the  strap  by  which  the  case  is  bound  to  the 
pack. 

CRADLE    TOMPIONS. 

The  cradle  tompions  are  sheet-metal  bodies  covered  with  flannel 
for  closing  the  central  bore  of  the  cradle  when  the  gun  is  dismounted. 
One  front  tompion  and  one  rear  tompion  with  the  connecting  sections 
of  strap  constitute  a  set. 

GUNNER'S  POUCH. 

The  gunner's  pouch  is  a  leather  case  for  the  lanyard,  originally 
designed  for  attaching  to  the  waist  belt  of  the  gunner  but  now  gen- 
erally fastened  to  the  rear  transom  of  the  trail. 

THE  GUNNER'S  QUADRANT. 

The  gunner's  quadrant  consists  of  a  frame  and  the  index  arm  which 

swings  in  the  frame.     This  frame  has  graduated  scales  ranging  from 

0  to  65°  on  both  sides  of  its  arc  and  a  toothed  rack  on  the  underside  of 

the  arc.     Two  frame  shoes  are  screwed  to  the  underside  of  the  frame 

61714—16 5  (65) 


66 

to  facilitate  placing  it  on  the  cradle.  The  index  arm  is  fastened  to  a 
lug  on  the  frame  which  allows  it  to  swing  along  the  rack  on  the  arc 
of  the  frame.  The  index  arm  head  engages  this  rack  and  is  held 
against  it  by  the  index  arm  head  spring,  located  in  the  index  arm. 
Index  arm  head  guides,  containing  the  index  marks,  are  screwed  to 
both  sides  of  the  head.  The  sliding  level  is  located  on  the  index  arm, 
which  is  graduated  from  0  to  60  minutes.  The  level  may  be  fastened 
tightly  to  the  index  arm  by  the  sliding  level  spring  and  screw.  On 
the  end  of  the  index  arm  is  located  the  sliding  level  stop.  The  gun- 
ner's quadrant  is  used  to  test  the  level  of  the  sights. 

GUNNER'S  QUADKANT  POUCH. 

The  gunner's  quadrant  pouch  is  a  leather  case  for  the  gunner's 
quadrant. 

HANDSPIKE. 

The  handspike  is  a  hardwood  staff  with  a  slotted  bronze  ferrule  on 
one  end,  which  fits  the  socket  in  the  shoe;  it  may  be  locked  to  the  shoe 
by  means  of  the  handspike  key;  a  cup-shaped  bronze  head  on  the 
other  end  is  used  for  compressing  the  buffer  springs.  The  two  pins 
in  the  body  form  stops  to  prevent  slipping  when  the  handspike  is 
used  as  a  lifting  bar. 

SIGHT    CASE. 

The  sight  case  is  a  cylindrical  leather  case  reinforced  with  steel 
and  has  a  hinged  cover.  The  case  is  arranged  to  receive  the  pano- 
ramic sight,  shank  with  level-holder  bracket  and  socket,  and  peep  sight 
complete.  The  sight  case  is  carried  in  the  gun  seat  in  the  cradle  when 
the  cradle  is  being  carried  in  pack. 

TOOL  POCKETS. 

The  two  pouches  of  leather  are  distinguished  by  their  interior 
arrangement  as  "tool  pocket  with  inside  pockets"  and  "tool  pocket 
with  inside  straps"  containing  the  material  listed  on  page  91. 

TUBULAR    OIL    CAN. 

Eight  cans  of  brass,  approximately  3  inches  in  diameter  by  15 
inches  long,  are  provided  for  carrying  a  supply  of  oil. 

TUBULAR    OIL-CAN    CARRIER. 

For  carrying  the  tubular  oil  cans  a  tubular  oil-can  carrier  is  pro- 
vided, consisting  of  two  pouches  of  leather  provided  with  straps  by 
which  the  cans  are  secured  and  attached  to  the  pack..  The  pouches 
are  right  and  left. 


Part  II  (a).   THE  PACK  HARNESS. 

The  group  of  parts  of  the  pack  outfit  used  for  leading  the  animal 
and  carrying  the  load  with  its  special  holders  is  called  the  "pack  har- 
ness." It  consists  of  the  blinder,  halter  bridle,  corona,  saddle  blanket, 
aparejo,  sbbrejalma,  crupper,  and  aparejo  cincha. 

These  parts  are  common  to  all  aparejo  outfits  and  may  be  used 
without  special  frames  for  packing  bundles  and  boxes. 

BLINDER    MODEL    OF    1916. 

A  pack  mule  is  ordinarily  blinded  during  harnessing  and  unhar- 
nessing, loading  and  unloading.  The  blinder  consists  of  an  inner 
and  outer  piece  of  russet  harness  leather  stitched  together  around 
the  outer  edges  and  joined  in  the  rear  by  leather  thongs,  the  whole 
shaped  to  fit  closely  around  the  animal's  eyes. 

HALTER    BRIDLE,    MODEL   OF    1910. 

This  article  is  designed  to  furnish  a  light,  strong  head  harness  for  a 
mule.  When  leading  the  animal,  on  the  march,  the  bit  and  its  straps 
are  removed  from  the  headstall  and  fastened  to  any  convenient  place 
on  the  pack  frame.  The  two  snaps  of  the  lead  rein  are  then  fastened 
to  the  floating  ring,  the  body  of  the  rein  forming  a  loop  convenient  for 
holding  in  the  hand. 

In  riding  an  animal  the  lead  rein  is  used  in  combination  with  the  bit, 
headstall,  and  bit  straps  as  a  bridle. 

When  a  mule  is  picketed  to  a  line  the  lead  rein  serves  as  a  halter 
strap. 

The  bit  is  made  of  nickel  steel  to  prevent  rusting. 

CORONA,    MODEL    OF    1915. 

The  corona  is  the  first  piece  of  harness  placed  on  the  mule's  back. 
It  is  a  saddle  pad  made  of  four  thicknesses  of  good  quality  gray  flannel 
blanket,  protected  from  sweat  by  a  lini  ig  of  cotton  duck.  The  corona 
is  made  in  three  sizes  and  each  size  is  stenciled  on  the  under  side  to  cor- 
respond with  the  size  of  the  aparejo  it  is  intended  to  accompany.  The 
width  is  26  inches  for  all  sizes.  In  placing  the  corona  it  is  laid  well 
forward  on  the  mule's  back,  canvas  side  down,  and  then  slid  to  the  rear 
until  its  front  edge  is  just  behind  the  point  of  the  withers,  care  being 
taken  that  the  hair  lies  smooth  beneath  it. 

When  manufactured  in  quantity,  10  per  cent  are  58-inch,  15  per 
cent  60-inch,  and  75  per  cent  62-inch. 

(67) 


68 

THE    SADDLE    BLANKET. 

The  saddle  blanket  forms  additional  padding  under  the  aparejo. 
It  is  carried  under  the  aparejo  and  over  the  corona. 

The  blanket  is  made  of  pure  wool  of  olive-drab  shade,  with  an 
olive-brown  border  of  two  stripes.  The  blankets  are  rectangular, 
72  by  84  inches.  Each  blanket  has  the  letters  "U.  S."  and  the 
bursting  shell  located  in  the  center. 

APAREJO,    MODEL    OF    1911. 

This  article  consists  of  an  aparejo  body  and  one  aparejo  frame. 
The  aparejo  body  is  made  of  two  rectangular  pieces  of  leather  (back 
and  belly  pieces)  sewed  together  along  the  edges  and  through  the 
middle,  forming  two  pouches.  The  edges,  the  middle  seams,  and 
particularly  the  ends  are  reinforced  with  heavy  leather  facings. 
Handholes  for  stuffing  are  left  in  the  belly  pieces,  and  holes  and 
slits  laced  with  thongs  are  made  in  the  back  pieces,  so  that  the 
frame,  or  parts  of  it,  may  be  inserted,  removed,  or  replaced.  The 
carrier  pieces  and  front  facings  have  lacing  holes  for  the  attachment 
and  adjustment  of  the  crupper.  Two  steel  chock  staples  attach  the 
sobrejalma  and  pack  frame  to  the  aparejo. 

The  rib  sticks  are  furnished  longer  than  necessary  and  should  be 
sawed  off  to  the  proper  length  after  the  boot  and  top  sticks  are 
firmly  rammed  home.  The  first  three  sticks  (starting  at  the  front) 
are  of  uniform  thickness;  the  remainder  are  tapered  to  give  the 
rear  of  the  aparejo  more  flexibility  than  the  front.  The  sticks  are 
stamped  and  are  intended  to  be  arranged  in  a  gradually  diminishing 
thickness. 

Cloth  is  tacked  to  the  top  stick  to  prevent  the  hay  from  slipping 
down. 

NOTE. — Aparejos  are  issued  to  the  service  with  ribs  in  place. 
They  are  furnished  in  58,  60,  and  62  inch  sizes.  When  issued  upon 
requisition,  the  sizes  are  furnished  as  requested. 

When  issued  without  requisition,  the  sizes  are  furnished  as  follows : 
15  per  cent  58-inch,  50  per  cent  60-inch,  and  35  per  cent  62-inch. 

SOBREJALMA,    MODEL    OF    1910. 

This  article  is  a  waterproof  and  wear-reducing  covering  for  the 
aparejo.  It  is  made  of  one  thickness  of  heavy  cotton  duck,  faced 
around  the  edges  on  the  upper  side  with  collar  leather.  Two  leather 
reinforces  are  placed  on  the  upper  side  to  protect  the  duck  from  the 
wear  of  the  load.  Holes  are  provided  through  which  the  chock- 
staples  of  the  aparejo  protrude;  chock  straps  passing  through  these 
chock-staples  hold  the  sobrejalma  and  pack-frame  on  the  aparejo. 
All  sobrej almas  are  25  inches  wide. 


APAPEJO  TOP-5TJCK,> 
LEFT. 


TOP  5TICK  PLA 


'TOP-STICK  BODY. 


BOOT- STICK  PLATE 
BOOT-STICK  BOEtt- 


Aparejo,Model  of  I9II;  Frame 

Left  Half. 


69 

When  manufactured  in  quantity  10  per  cent  are  58-inch;  15  per 
cent  are  60-inch,  and  75  per  cent  are  62-inch. 

CRUPPER,  MODEL   OF   1912. 

The  crupper  is  made  of  russet  collar  leather,  shaped  (and  padded 
in  the  middle)  to  fit  the  animal.  The  sidepieces  extend  forward, 
across  the  aparejo,  and  are  laced  to  it  in  front  and  held  up  at  rear 
by  latigo-leather  thongs.  The  depth  of  the  sidepieces  affords  a 
broad  surface  to  bear  against  the  animal  and  also  prevents  the  crup- 
per from  sagging.  The  sidepieces  are  reinforced  with  leather,  and 
those  portions  which  come  in  contact  with  the  animal's  flanks  are 
lined  with  duck.  Cruppers  are  made  in  one  size  only,  78  inches  long. 

APAREJO    CINCHA,  MODEL   OF   1910. 

The  aparejo  cincha  is  10  inches  wide  and  is  made  of  cotton  duck, 
folded  and  stitched  along  the  middle.  Both  ends  are  faced  with 
leather,  and  the  end  to  which  the  cincha  strap  is  fastened  carries  a 
five-sixteenths-inch  steel  rod  in  the  fold  of  the  lacing-end  piece,while 
the  other  end  has  a  curved  piece  of  gas  pipe  (cincha  bar).  Fifteen 
inches  from  the  strap  end  of  the  cincha,  a  leather  throng  (finger  loop) 
is  attached,  which  is  used  to  carry  the  slack  of  the  cincha  strap.  The 
cincha  strap  is  of  harness  leather  and  has  a  rendering  ring  at  one  end; 
this  end  is  attached  to  the  cincha  body  by  a  latigo-leather  thong. 
The  metal  parts  are  either  of  bronze  or  are  copper  plated  to  prevent 
rotting  of  the  leather.  The  cincha  is  made  in  three  sizes  and  when 
manufactured  in  quantity  10  per  cent  of  68-inch,  15  per  cent  of  70- 
inch,  and  75  per  cent  of  72-inch.  The  size  stamped  on  the  cincha  is 
the  size  of  the  aparejo  for  which  it  is  designed.  The  cincha  body  is 
10  inches  longer  than  the  corresponding  aparejo. 

INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    SETTING   UP   THE    APAREJO. 

To  rib  up. — Unlace  the  slits  and  handholes;  soak  the  aparejo  in 
tepid  water  for  about  15  minutes;  drain  it  and  lay  flat,  back  pieces 
up;  insert  the  boot  stick  and  the  top  stick  through  the  slit  in  rear 
and  press  them  to  their  places  at  the  boot  and  the  center-stitch  line, 
slotted  sides  up;  insert  the  numbered  set  of  nine  ribs 'through  the  slit 
in  rear  in  their  numerical  order  and  seat  them  in  that  order  from 
collar  to  rear  in  the  slots  of  the  boot  stick  and  top  stick,  butts  at  the 
boot;  secure  the  top  of  each  rib  as  it  is  seated  by  inserting  the  aparejo 
key  at  the  front  edge  below  the  collar  and  passing  it  over  the  rib  in 
place;  fasten  the  key  bar  to  the  collar  by  the  thong.  * 

NOTE. — The  aparejo  after  being  set  up  should  under  no  circum- 
stances be  allowed  to  dry  in  the  sun. 


70 

To  fiU  or  pad. — Turn  the  aparejo  over,  belly  pieces  up;  procure 
about  6  pounds  of  long,  fine,  soft,  elastic  hay;  taking  a  little  at  a 
time,  tease  or  "mix"  it  carefully;  insert  it  through  the  handhole  and 
thus  gradually  fill  the  body  of  the  aparejo  with  a  smooth  and  even 
layer,  not  more  than  2  inches  thick. 

NOTE. — Other  filling  may  be  used  in  necessity,  such  as  moss,  excel- 
sior, curled  hair,  or  sea  grass;  but  these  substitutes  are  difficult  of 
manipulation  in  alterations  necessary  to  accommodate  the  rigging 
to  injuries  of  the  mule.  By  teasing  or  "  mixing  "  is  meant  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  stalks  of  the  hay  go  that  they  will  cross  one  another.  The 
body  of  the  aparejo  is  that  part  which  comes  in  contact  with  the  body 
of  the  mule.  As  3  inches  of  the  lower  portion  of  each  boot  stick  and 
3  inches  of  the  upper  portion  of  each  top  stick  must  not  come  into 
contact  with  the  mule,  no  filling  should  be  pressed  under  the  boot 
stick  or  within  3  inches  of  the  center  of  the  stitch  line.  The  body 
course  tapers,  however,  so  as  to  overlap  the  boot  stick  and  saddle  bar, 
and  also  tapers  toward  front  and  rear. 

To  face  or  dress. — To  adjust  the  aparejo  more  accurately  to  the 
shape  of  the  mule,  introduce  filling  and  press  it  well  into  the  corner 
of  the  front  boot;  working  toward  the  handhole,  continue  the  facing 
along  the  boot  stick  and  front  edge,  gradually  increasing  its  thickness 
to  about  1  inch  at  7  inches  from  the  corner  and  forming  its  inner 
edge  into  the  arc  of  a  circle  concentric  with  the  handhole,  the  thick- 
ness tapering  to  the  ends  of  the  arc;  continue  this  for  3  inches  more 
toward  the  handhole,  rapidly  decreasing  the  thickness  to  nothing. 
Proceed  in  exactly  the  same  way  at  the  collar;  under  no  circum- 
stances should  the  collar  facing  reach  within  7  inches  of  the  center 
of  the  handhole.  Connect  the  front  boot  and  collar  facings  by  a 
dressing  along  the  front  edge  about  3  inches  wide  and  1  inch  thick, 
decreasing  in  thickness  toward  the  handhole  and  toward  the  middle 
of  the  edge. 

NOTE. — In  facing  up,  introduce  the  filling  with  the  palm  of  the 
hand  up,  so  as  not  to  disturb  the  body  course.  In  case  the  leather 
will  not  yield  enough  to  permit  the  filling  to  be  introduced  well  into 
the  corners,  a  tamping  stick  may  be  used  to  raise  it.  This  stick/  used 
with  the  commercial  aparejo,  is  4  or  5  feet  long,  1£  inches  in  diameter, 
wedge-shaped  for  4  inches  from  one  end,  the  edge  of  the  wedge  being 
about  }  inch  thick  and  grooved.  The  object  of  the  boot  facing  is  to 
cause*  the  boot  stick  to  carry  horizontally  and  parallel  to  the  center 
of  the  mule  and  to  give  free  action  to  the  mule's  elbow.  Mules  of 
large  barrel  will  require  a  thicker  facing  than  described.  The  object 
of  the  collar  facing  is  to  cause  the  saddle  bar  to  carry  horizontally  and 
parallel  with  the  center  of  the  mule  and  to  protect  the  mule's  withers. 
Mules  with  high  withers  will  require  a  thicker  facing  than  that 
described.  In  setting  to  the  shape  of  the  mule,  the  aparejo  bends 
at  the  middle  of  the  front  edge.  It  is  important  that  the  body 


71 

course  remain  undisturbed  during  dressing,  arid  that  the  instructions 
given  be  carefully  followed  to  avoid  sore  withers  or  tails  and  body  or 
belly  bunches. 

To  attach  the  crupper. — Stand  the  aparejo  on  its  boots  in  its  nor- 
mal position;  secure  a  lace  thong  to  the  front  hole  on  the  upper  facing 
of  the  crupper  on  each  side  and  fasten  the  crupper  with  short  thongs 
to  the  center  holes  of  the  carrier  pieces  on  the  rear  of  the  aparejo; 
pass  the  crupper  lace  thong  through  the  second  hole  from  the  top  of 
the  front  facing  of  the  aparejo,  through  the  second  hole  of  the  crup- 
per, through  the  third  hole  of  the  aparejo  facing,  through  the  fourth 
hole  of  the  crupper,  and  so  on,  finishing  through  the  bottom  holes 
of  the  facing  and  crupper  and  tying  to  the  crupper  hole. 

NOTE. — In  lacing  the  crupper  to  the  aparejo,  the  thong  must  be 
passed  through  the  holes  from  the  outside  and  must  not  be  twisted, 
the  lacing  must  not  cross,  and  it  is  important  that  the  tie  be  made  on 
the  last  hole  of  the  crupper  instead  of  the  aparejo. 

Guayaba,  willow,  dogwood,  hickory,  or  any  other  wood  combining 
the  qualities  of  permanent  elasticity  and  strength  may  be  used  to 
replace  broken  ribs.  When  the  set-up  aparejo  is  to  be  filled,  no  soak- 
ing is  necessary;  instead,  the  belly  pieces  are  made  pliable  by  rubbing 
with  a  sponge. 

Mules  weighing  850  to  900  pounds  require  a  58-inch  aparejo;  1,000 
pounds,  60-inch;  1,100  pounds,  62-inch;  and  for  heavier  mules  requi- 
sition should  be  made  for  larger  sizes. 

When  the  mule  is  loaded,  the  cincha,  in  travel,  should  free  the 
elbow  by  about  1  inch;  more  than  this  will  prevent  a  proper  grip  on 
the  belly. 

If  the  boots  ride  high  enough  on  the  body  of  the  mule,  or  if  they 
reach  under  the  belly,  even  though  they  ride  horizontally  and  paral- 
lel to  the  center  of  the  mule,  the  aparejo  will  be  likely  to  turn  easily. 
This  fault  encourages  injuriously  tight  cinching. 

If  one  or  both  boots  flare  out  or  turn  in  toward  the  mule,  cinch 
sores,  sore  tails,  or  belly  bunches  are  caused. 

The  width  of  the  collar-arch  clearance  should  be  at  least  5^  inches. 
If  it  is  too  narrow  or  too  wide,  or  if  the  saddle  bars  slope  downward 
toward  the  front,  there  will  be  sores  on  the  withers;  if  they  slope  to 
the  rear,  there  will  be  injuries  over  the  loins  called  "  kidney  sores." 

If  the  lacing  of  the  crupper  is  drawn  too  tight  at  the  bottom,  the 
lower  edge  of  the  crupper  will  rub  the  buttocks  and  cause  abrasions. 

The  object  to  be  attained  is  the  uniform  distribution  of  the  weight 
of  a  load  over  that  portion  of  the  mule's  body  which  is  anatomically 
suited  to  the  carrying  of  a  burden,  so  that  the  saddle  will  ride  with 
little  motion  and  without  friction  of  the  bearing  surface  on  the  body. 
The  contact  of  the  bearing  surface  of  the  saddle  must  be  close  at  all 
points.  As  the  mule's  body  swells  from  front  to  rear,  the  more  or  less 
cylindrically  shaped  aparejo,  after  the  body  course  is  laid,  must  be 


72 

modified  by  facing  up  so  as  to  provide  a  concave  surface  to  fit  over 
the  convex  surface.  But,  as  the  barrel  of  the  properly  conformed 
mule  is  nearly  cylindrical  through  the  rear  half  or  more  of  the  con- 
tact surface,  no  facing,  as  a  rule,  is  necessary  in  the  rear  part  of  the 
aparejo,  although  confirmation  may  require  it  occasionally.  The 
above  instructions  were  prescribed  by  H.  W.  Daly,  chief  packm  aster, 
Quarterma  ster's  Department. 

CAEE    OF    RUSSET    LEATHER. 

Leather  equipments  which  have  become  wet  should  be  dried  in  the 
shade.  Wet  leather  exposed  to  the  direct  rays  of  the  sun  or  to  the 
heat  of  a  stove  or  radiator  becomes  hard  and  brittle. 

When  russet-leather  equipments  become  soiled  in  service  they 
should  be  cleaned  by  carefully  washing  the  leather  with  a  sponge 
moistened  with  a  heavy  lather  made  of  clean  water  and  Castile  or 
Frank  Miller's  soap,  and  then  rubbing  vigorously  with  a  dry  cloth 
until  the  leather  is  completely  dry. 

If  the  leather  becomes  harsh,  dry,  and  brittle  from  exposure  to 
water  or  other  causes,  clean  as  above  described,  and  while  the  leather 
is  still  slightly  moist  apply  an  exceedingly  light  coat  of  neat's-foot 
oil  by  rubbing  with  a  soft  cloth  moistened  (not  saturated)  with  the 
oil.  If  it  is  found  that  too  much  oil  has  been  used,  the  surplus  can 
be  readily  removed  by  rubbing  with  a  sponge  moistened  with  naphtha 
or  gasoline.  But  these  oils  are  not  issued  for  this  purpose. 

Where  a  polish  is  desired,  the  leather  should  first  be  thoroughly 
cleaned  and  then  the  leather  polish  or  dressing  supplied  by  the  Ord- 
nance Department  should  be  applied  sparingly  and  thoroughly 
rubbed  in  with  a  soft,  dry  cloth.  Scars,  cuts,  or  abrasions  of  the 
leather  may  be  improved  in  appearance  but  not  obliterated  by  similar 
use  of  the  leather  polish. 

Kusset  leather  may  be  cleaned,  oiled,  and  polished  as  described 
above,  but  it  should  be  noted  that  if  more  than  a  light  coat  of  oil  be 
given  the  leather  will  be  greatly  darkened  and  will  quickly  soil  the 
clothing.  No  method  of  cleaning  will  restore  the  original  light  color 
of  the  leather  or  remove  stains  or  discolorations. 

CARE    OF    BLACK    LEATHER. 

To  clean  and  dress  black  leather,  wash  it  in  water  (lukewarm  pre- 
ferred) with  Castile  soap.  An  old  horse  brush  will  be  found  very 
satisfactory  for  applying  the  soap  and  water.  Dry  in  the  shade; 
when  almost  dry,  apply  the  blacking,  rubbing  it  in  thoroughly. 

Dry  in  the  shade  and  then  apply  neat's-foot  oil  with  a  sponge  or 
rag,  rubbing  it  well  until  the  leather  is  soft  and  pliable. 

When  dry,  a  certain  amount  of  oil  and  blacking  will  exude  from 
the  leather ;  this  should  be  rubbed  off  with  a  dry  cloth. 


tf-irs 

^ 

1* 


Part  II  (b).— SPECIAL  PACK  EQUIPMENT. 


Axletree  lever  securing  strap. 
Axle  rest. 
Cargo  cincha: 

Long. 

Short. 

Fastening  straps  (for  rods,  etc.). 
Lash  ropes. 

Load  straps  for  canvas  sacks  for  spare 
sticks. 


Sling  rope. 
Thongs. 
Trail  pads. 
Wheel  hangers: 

Left. 

Right,  with  cincha. 
Wheel  tie  straps. 
Ammunition  chests: 

12.5-pound  projectile. 


Pack  covers.  18-pound  projectile. 

Pack  frames: 

Model  of  1912. 

Heavy. 

Plates  XII  to  XXI,  inclusive,  show  some  of  the  special  pack  equip- 
ments with  their  loads  attached,  placed  on  the  packs.  A  description 
of  the  articles  in  the  equipment  follows: 

THE    HEAVY   PACK   FRAME. 

The  heavy  pack  frame  consists  of  a  metal  body  to  which  are  hinged 
two  pack-frame  sides.  The  body  consists  of  a  pommel  and  a  cantle 
riveted  to  two  connecting  bronze  tie  braces.  Lugs  projecting 
forward  from  the  pommel  and  to  the  rear  from  the  cantle  have  slots 
which  drop  over  the  chock  staples  of  the  aparejo.  Four  hook  hinges, 
on  the  lower  ends  of  which  are  cast  heavy  hooks  for  engaging  side 
loads,  are  riveted  to  the  upper  parts  of  the  pack-frame  sides  and  secure 
the  sides  to  the  body.  A  pack-frame  side  has  two  vertical  braces  of 
spring  steel  which  hang  downward  and  are  connected  near  their  upper 
and  lower  ends  by  steel  side  bars  upon  which  are  riveted  side-bar 
boards. 

PACK   FRAME,    MODEL   OF   1912. 

This  pack  frame  consists  of  steel  arches  to  which  are  hinged  two 
pack-frame  sides.  Lugs  projecting  forward  on  the  front  arch  and  to 
the  rear  on  the  rear  arch  have  slots  which  drop  over  the  chock  staples 
of  the  aparejo.  Four  hook  hinges,  on  the  lower  ends  of  which  are  cast 
heavy  hooks  for  engaging  side  loads,  are  riveted  to  the  upper  parts  of 
the  sides  and  secure  them  to  the  arches  by  means  of  pins  and  split 
pins.  A  pack-frame  side  has  two  vertical  braces  of  spring  steel  which 
hang  downward  and  are  connected  near  their  upper  and  lower  ends  by 
steel  side  bars  upon  which  are  riveted  side-bar  boards.  Eight  steel 

(73) 


74 

strap-loop  clevises  with  four  straps  are  fastened  to  the  arches  by  the 
pins  securing  the  sides  to  the  arches  and  furnish  means  of  lashing 
articles  to  the  pack  frame. 

WHEEL    HANGER. 

These  hangers  are  designed  to  enable  the  wheels  to  be  easily  and 
quickly  packed  on  the  pack  frame. 

The  eyes  of  the  yoke  fit  over  the  hooks  on  the  pack  frame.  A 
cincha,  permanently  fastened  to  the  right  hanger,  holds  the  load 
down. 

No  linchpin  is  provided  with  the  hanger,  it  being  intended  that  the 
linchpin  from  the  carriage  should  be  used  to  hold  the  wheels  in  place. 

WHEEL-TIE    STRAP. 

This  strap  is  used  for  strapping  the  wheels  together.  It  may  be 
left  on  the  wheel  in  action  if  the  carriage  is  not  to  be  moved  any 
great  distance. 

AXLE    REST. 

This  article  is  used  as  a  seat  for  the  axle  on  the  pommel  of  the  pack 
frame. 

FASTENING    STRAPS. 

These  straps,  1  inch  wide  and  47  inches  long,  are  provided  to  fasten 
the  sponges,  rods,  etc.,  to  the  frame  on  the  wheel  mule. 

The  loop  on  the  bottom  of  the  strap  is  designed  so  that  the  strap 
may  be  held  to  the  frame  when  the  rods,  etc.,  are  removed. 

TRAIL    PAD. 

This  pad,  of  russet  bag  leather  stuffed  with  curled  hair,  is  designed 
to  be  tied  to  the  bottom  of  the  trail  for  protecting  the  mule. 

CARGO    CINCHA    SHORT. 

This  cincha  consists  of  a  double  thickness  of  cotton  duck  with  a 
russet-collar  leather  facing  strengthened  at  the  ends  with  a  leather 
end  piece  in  which  is  secured  the  cincha  bars.  A  cincha  strap  is 
fastened  at  one  end  to  a  cincha  bar.  This  strap  is  used  to  go  entirely 
around  the  pack  animal,  binding  the  load  tightly.  It  is  used  for  the 
gun,  cradle,  and  trail  packs. 

CARGO   CINCHA,    LONG. 

This  article  is  similar  to  the  cargo  cincha,  short,  the  difference 
being  in  the  length. 

It  is  used  for  the  ammunition  packs. 


Ml- 


PLATE  XX 


14 


\Sadol ler$   Tool  Kit. 


^4~898 


75 

LASH    CINCHA. 

This  cincha  consists  of  a  cotton-duck  body  reinforced  at  the  ends 
with  leather.  An  aluminum  hook  at  one  end  and  a  latigo  lacing  at 
the  other  end  provide  means  for  connecting  the  body  with  the  lash 
rope. 

The  lash  rope  and  lash  cincha  are  used  on  the  kit  packs  and  are 
designed  to  lash  down  tightly  the  side  loads,  generally  with  a  "  dia- 
mond hitch." 

AXLETREE    LEVER    SECURING    STRAPS. 

The  spare  axletree  lever  is  fastened  to  the  top  of  the  pack  frame  by 
means  of  these  straps. ' 

LOAD    STRAPS. 

These  straps  are  designed  to  fasten  canvas  sacks  of  spare  aparejo 
sticks  to  the  top  of  the  loads. 

AMMUNITION    CHESTS. 

Shell  and  shrapnel  ammunition  are  issued  by  the  Ordnance  Depart- 
ment in  moisture-proof  tin  packing  cans,  hermetically  sealed  and 
placed  in  wooden  packing  boxes,  4  rounds  per  box.  The  weight  of 
a  filled  box  is  about  100  pounds  for  18-pound  projectiles  and  about 
75.5  pounds  for  12.5-pound  projectiles. 

For  transportation  on  mules  the  rounds,  including  tin  containers, 
are  transferred  to  the  ammunition  chests  of  the  pack  outfits.  The 
chests  for  18-pound  projectiles  hold  4  rounds  each  and  those  for  the 
12.5-pound  projectiles  5  rounds  each,  the  weights  when  filled  being 
about  108.8  pounds  and  about  103.8  pounds,  respectively.  Two 
ammunition  chests  are  carried  on  each  mule. 


Part   II    (c).— TOOLS   AND   ACCESSORIES   FOR   SPECIAL   PACK 

EQUIPMENT. 


Canvas  sack  for  spare  sticks. 

Chest  for  fire-control  equipment. 

Field  desk. 

Lantern  chest. 

Lifting  bars. 

Pioneer  rolls,  right. 

Pioneer  rolls,  left. 

Pouch  for  spare  parts. 

Ration  crates. 

Rigging  covers. 


Spare  sights  chest. 
Supply  chest: 

Blacksmith's. 

Miscellaneous. 

Saddler's. 

Tools. 

Canvas  watering  bucket. 
Picket  rope  sections. 
Picket  pins  and  eyes. 
Blacksmith's  tools,  set. 


A  complete  list  of  the  tools  and  accessories  for  special  pack  equip- 
ment are  listed  on  page  92. 

A  description  of  some  of  these  articles  follows. 


CANVAS    SACK   FOR   SPARE    STICKS. 


A  sack  of  olive  drab  duck,  tied  with  cotton  chalk  line,  is  used  to 
carry  the  spare  boot  sticks,  top  sticks,  and  ribs  for  the  aparejo. 


LIFTING   BARS. 


These  bars  are  designed  to  facilitate  loading  the  gun,  cradle,  and 
trail  to  pack. 

The  collar  on  the  long  bar  and  the  bend  in  the  short  bar  are  to 
prevent  the  loads  slipping  toward  either  end.  The  thong  in  each  bar 
is  provided  for  tying  it  to  pack. 

RIGGING    COVER. 

The  rigging  cover,  made  of  olive  drab  duck,  is  43  inches  wide  and 
long  enough  to  cover  8  packs  of  the  outfit  when  in  park. 

PICKET-ROPE    SECTION   AND   PICKET   PIN   AND   EYE. 

The  picket-rope  section  consists  of  a  1-inch  diameter  manila  rope 
50  feet  long  with  a  loop  spliced  on  each  end.  It  is  designed  to  be 
stretched  along  the  ground  and  fastened  at  the  ends  with  pins.  The 
animals  can  then  be  fastened  by  means  of  their  halter  bridle  reins  to 
this  rope  in  the  usual  way.  One  pin  is  provided  for  each  section. 
Where  two  sections  are  used  together  the  sections  of  rope  can  be 
fastened  together  by  means  of  the  loops  and  a  pin  driven  at  each  end. 
If  it  is  necessary  to  use  the  sections  separately,  a  shovel  or  pick 
mattock  could  be  used  as  a  "deadman." 

(76) 


PLATE  XXII 


Tool  Kit 


^4897 


77 

SCHALLER  FORGE  AND  TOOL  CHEST. 
[PI.  XXIV.] 

The  Schaller  forge  and  tool  chest  are  parts  of  the  set  of  black- 
smith's tools  listed  on  page  97.  They  are  made  entirely  of  metal. 
The  drivewheel  is  mounted  upon  an  arm,  which  can  be  swung  about 
the  center  of  the  blower  shaft  as  an  axis.  The  blower,  with  the  arm, 
swings  about  trunnions  concentric  with  the  exhaust  tube  of  the 
blower.  The  arrangement  is  such  that  the  entire  mechanism  may 
be  folded  within  the  body  of  the  forge.  When  set  up  for  use  the  forge 
body  is  supported  by  four  legs,  which  are  braced  by  two  leg  tie-rods. 
The  lid  is  supported  in  a  horizontal  position  and  forms  a  shelf  for 
tools,  etc. 

The  tool  chest  accompanying  the  Schaller  forge  contains  tools  and 
accessories  for  use  with  the  forge.  The  anvil  and  small  vise  may  be 
mounted  on  the  tool  chest  in  fixtures  provided  for  that  purpose. 

The  forge  and  tool  chest  are  suspended  from  the  pack  frame  by 
means  of  hanger  bars,  one  riveted  to  the  lid  of  the  forge  and  the  other 
to  the  bottom  plate  of  the  tool  chest. 

BLACKSMITH'S  TOOL  KIT. 
[PI.  XXV.] 

The  blacksmiths'  tool  kit,  which  is  part  of  set  of  blacksmiths'  tools, 
is  a  cloth  body  to  which  are  stitched  leather  pockets  for  carrying  the 
blacksmiths'  tools.  Two  latigo  thongs  and  a  leather  billet,  with 
buckle  and  chape,  tie  the  roll  into  a  compact  shape  for  packing  into 
the  forge  tool  chest. 

POUCH   FOR    SPARE    PARTS. 

This  is  a  cylindrical  shaped  leather  case  used  for  carrying  small 
spare  parts  for  the  carriage  and  hand-fuze  setters  listed  on  page  93. 
Two  fastening  straps  hold  the  pouch  securely  in  place  on  top  of  the 
pack  frame. 

PACK  COVERS  WITH  ROPES. 

Pack  covers  are  made  of  duck  in  two  pieces  each  36  by  72  inches. 
They  are  lapped  and  stitched  together  in  the  middle  and  are  hemmed 
on  the  ends.  They  are  used  to  wrap  the  kit  packs  in  before  placing 
on  the  mule. 

There  are  provided  four  manila  ropes:  A  lash  rope,  50  feet  long,  a 
sling  rope,  and  two  lair  ropes,  each  30  feet  long,  which  bind  the  kit 
packs  and  hold  them  tightly  in  place  on  the  mule. 

PIONEER    ROLLS. 
[Pis.  XVI  and  XVII.] 

The  pioneer's  pack  consists  of  two  rolls,  one  right  and  one  left,  each 
carrying  the  tools  as  listed  on  page  91. 


78 

A  pioneer  roll  is  a  leather  body  with  straps  for  holding  the  tools. 
A  pack  body  strap,  attached  to  the  body  proper  by  keepers,  holds 
the  roll  compactly  together  for  transportation.  Kiveted  to  the  back 
of  the  roll  is  a  hanger  bar  by  which  the  load  is  suspended  from  the 
pack  frame. 

SUPPLY    CHESTS. 

The  four  supply  chests  are  made  of  wood,  reinforced  by  corner  and 
reinforce  plates.  A  partition  divides  the  interior  into  two  compart- 
ments to  accommodate  the  supplies  carried.  To  the  bottom  of  the 
chest  is  riveted  a  hanger  bar  by  means  of  which  the  chest  is  sus- 
pended from  the  pack  frame,  one  on  each  side  of  the  mule.  By 
means  of  a  pack  cincha  rope  and  two  top  straps,  the  former  passing 
under  the  aparejo  and  the  latter  passing  through  strap  fasteners 
screwed  to  each  end  of  the  chest,  the  load  is  held  securely  to  the 
pack  frame.  A  Yale  lock  with  chain  attachment  is  furnished  with 
each  chest. 

For  lists  of  tools  carried  in  these  chests  see  pages  97  and  98. 

For  supplies  carried  in  these  chests,  see  pages  98,  99,  and  100. 


[Plate  XX.] 

The  harnessmakers'  tool  kit  is  a  leather  body  provided  with  pockets 
for  carrying  the  tools  as  listed  on  page  96.  Two  latigo  leather  thongs 
bind  the  kit  together  for  loading  into  the  supply  chest,  carried  on  the 
left  side  of  the  supply-chest  mule. 

CARPENTERS'  TOOL  KIT. 

[Plate  XXII.] 

The  carpenters'  tool  kit  is  a  leather  body  provided  with  pockets  for 
carrying  the  tools  as  listed  on  page  97.  Two  latigo  leather  thongs 
bind  the  kit  together  for  loading  into  the  supply  chest. 

DUMMY    PACKS. 

A  dummy  pack  consists  of  two  bodies,  two  straps,  two  ropes,  two 
keepers,  two  hooks,  four  hanger  eyes,  and  four  rope  rings.  The 
bodies  are  flat  pieces  of  cast  iron,  with  lugs  and  hanger  eyes  on  their 
underside  which  engage  the  pack  frame,  and  are  strapped  to  the 
pack  harness  by  means  of  the  ropes,  straps,  and  smaller  parts. 

For  the  purpose  of  exercising  the  mules  under  loads  without 
having  to  use  the  regular  loads,  dummy  packs  are  manufactured 
and  will  be  issued  on  special  requisition,  if  desired,  by  the  battery 
commander  in  sufficient  quantity  for  28  mules  per  battery. 


PLATE  XXV 


.    buckle  chqpe. 


Part  III.— ALLOWANCE  OF  AMMUNITION. 


The  annual  allowances  of  ammunition  for  the  instruction  of  moun- 
tain artillery  is  prescribed  from  time  to  time  in  War  Department 
Orders.  These  orders  give  full  information  as  to  the  allowances  of 
fixed  and  blank  ammunition  for  the  2.95-inch  mountain  guns,  sub- 
caliber  cartridges,  pistols,  and  shotguns  and  care  of  the  same,  dispo- 
sition of  empty  shells,  etc. 

TARGETS. 

Description  and  allowances  of  mobile  artillery  targets  and  acces- 
sories are  given  in  the  pamphlet,  Ordnance  Department  Form  No. 
1994. 

(79) 


Part  IV.— GENERAL  INFORMATION. 


PAINTING   ARTILLERY   MATERIEL. 

The  paint  issued  for  this  purpose  is  of  olive-drab  color  put  up  in 
5-pound  cans  ready  for  use,  and  is  applied  to  both  wood  and  metal 
parts.  If  the  paint  is  too  thick,  turpentine  should  be  used  as  a 
thinner,  but  not  to  greater  extent  than  2  per  cent  by  volume. 

All  steel  and  iron  nonbearing  surfaces  should  be  painted.  Wearing 
and  bearing  surfaces,  teeth  of  gear  wheels,  elevating  screws,  piston 
rods,  cylinders,  counter-recoil  springs,  and  interior  of  cradle  should 
not  be  painted. 

All  parts  to  be  painted  should  be  free  from  dirt  or  grease.  They 
may  be  washed  in  a  liquid  made  by  dissolving  one-half  pound  sal 
soda  in  8  quarts  of  warm  water,  then  rinsed  in  clean  water,  and 
wiped  thoroughly  dry. 

Where  the  materiel  is  in  fair  condition  and  only  marred  in  spots, 
the  marred  places  should  be  pruned  with  olive-drab  paint,  second 
coat,  and  permitted  to  dry.  Then  the  whole  surface  should  be  sand- 
papered with  No.  1J  sandpaper  and  a  coat  of  paint  applied  and 
allowed  to  dry  thoroughly  before  use. 

Where  the  materiel  is  in  bad  condition  all  parts  should  be  thor- 
oughly sandpapered  with  No.  2J  sandpaper,  be  given  a  coat  of  paint, 
and  be  permitted  to  dry  for  at  least  24  hours;  then  sandpapered  with 
No.  00  sandpaper,  apply  a  finishing  coat,  and  permit  the  parts  to  dry 
thoroughly  before  use. 

Articles  which  can  be  easily  cleaned  and  repainted  may  be  immersed 
in  the  solution.  It  is  forbidden  to  immerse  articles  which  can  not  be 
entirely  repainted,  for  example:  Ammunition  chests,  the  joints,  and 
some  parts  of  the  interior  of  which  it  would  not  be  practicable  to 
repaint. 

In  general,  two  coats  of  paint  per  year  will  be  sufficient  to  keep 
the  materiel  in  good  condition.  After  repeated  painting  the  paint 
may  become  so  thick  as  to  scale  off  in  places  or  give  an  unsightly 
appearance.  It  may  then  be  removed  for  repainting,  as  follows: 

Dissolve  1  pound  of  concentrated  lye,  powdered  form,  in  6  pints 
of  hot  water,  and  slake  in  enough  lime  to  give  the  solution  the  con- 
sistency of  paint.  Use  the  solution  freshly  mixed  and  apply  to  the 
parts  where  paint  is  to  be  removed  with  a  brush  or  with  waste  tied 
to  the  end  of  a  stick.  When  the  solution  begins  to  dry  on  the  surface 

(80) 


81 

use  a  scraper  to  remove  the  old  paint,  and  complete  the  cleaning  of 
the  surface  with  cloth  and  water.  If  one  application  is  not  sufficient 
to  loosen  the  paint,  apply  a  second  coat.  Before  painting  wash  the 
surface  with  sal  soda  water,  rinse  with  clean  water,  and  then  wipe 
thoroughly  as  described  above. 

OIL    FOR    ARTILLERY    MATERIEL. 

For  the  service,  cleaning,  and  preservation  of  this  materiel  the 
Ordnance  Department  issues  hydroline  oil,  lubricating  oil,  clock  oil, 
sperm  oil,  coal  oil,  neat's-foot  oil,  and  light  slushing  oil.  Each  of 
these  oils  is  suited  for  the  particular  purpose  for  which  it  is  issued, 
as  stated  below,  and  care  should  be  taken  that  it  is  not  used  for  other 
purposes. 

The  hydroline  oil  is  for  use  in  the  recoil  cylinders  of  the  carriages 
and  for  no  other  purpose. 

The  lubricating  oil  will  be  used  exclusively  in  all  oil  holes  of  the 
materiel  and  in  lubricating  such  parts  as  wheels  and  axles,  gun  slide, 
and  elevating  mechanisms,  hinges,  different  surfaces  of  breechblocks, 
threads  of  breech  recess,  etc. 

Clock  oil  should  be  used  on  all  bearings  of  the  panoramic  sight, 
and  fuze  setters,  and  worms  of  the  rear  sight. 

In  all  cases  clock  oil  should  only  be  used  when  the  instruments 
mentioned  are  disassembled  for  cleaning.  When  used  it  should  be 
applied  by  dropping  from  the  end  of  the  dropper  attached  to  the  end 
of  the  cork. 

The  sperm  oil  is  a  lighter  lubricant  than  the  lubricating  oil,  and 
may  be  used  on  the  gears  of  sights,  fuze  setters,  parts  of  pistols,  etc. ; 
lubricating  oil  may  also  be  used  on  such  parts. 

Coal  oil  is  used  by  the  Ordnance  Department  for  cleaning  purposes. 
In  the  field  it  may  be  used  for  lanterns.  Coal  oil  for  general  illumi- 
nating purposes  is  furnished  by  the  Quartermaster's  Department. 

Neat's-foot  oil  is  used  for -the  care  and  preservation  of  all  leather 
equipment. 

Light  slushing  oil  is  prescribed  for  use  in  the  protection  and  preser- 
vation of  all  bright  or  unpainted  surfaces  of  steel  or  iron  on  all  parts 
of  the  equipment  when  the  materiel  is  to  remain  unused  for  an 
appreciable  length  of  time.  Its  use  as  a  lubricant  for  mobile  artillery 
is  forbidden. 

Before  applying  the  slushing  oil  to  any  surface,  the  part  should  be 
thoroughly  cleaned,  so  as  to  be  free  from  rust,  water,  coal  oil,  lubri- 
cating oil,  etc.,  as  their  presence  will  cause  rusting  under  the  slushing 
oil.  The  slushing  oil  should  then  be  applied  in  a  thin,  uniform  coat, 
since  this  is  ALL  that  is  necessary  to  give  good  protection. 

Except  in  very  cold  weather  it  can  be  applied  by  using  a  paint 
brush  as  when  painting;  in  cold  weather  it  should  be  applied  by 
61714—16 6 


82 

stippling — that  is,  lightly  tapping  the  surface  with  the  end  of  the 
sash  tool  held  with  bristles  perpendicular  to  the  surface  to  be  cov- 
ered. It  can  be  applied  to  the  bores  of  guns  by  the  slush  brush 
issued  for  the  purpose.  In  cold  weather  it  should  be  warmed  before 
use  for  coating  the  bores  of  guns. 

It  may  be  readily  removed  by  the  use  of  burlap  or  waste  dipped  in 
coal  oil. 

REPAIRS    FOE    FIELD    ARTILLERY     MATERIEL     ISSUED    TO    THE    UNITED 
STATES    ARMY   AND    THE    NATIONAL   GUARD. 

Instructions  relative  to  making  repairs  to  field  batteries  and  fur- 
nishing ordnance  stores  and  supplies  for  them  will  be  found  in  the 
general  orders  issued  by  the  War  Department  from  time  to  time. 

Instructions  in  reference  to  the  care,  use,  and  repair  of  delicate 
instruments,  such  as  sights,  telescopes,  and  range  finders  will  be  found 
in  General  orders,  No.  47,  War  Department,  Washington,  March  24, 
1905,  and  in  O.  O.  pamphlet,  Form  No.  1795. 

INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    RIVETING. 

Whenever  a  rivet  is  broken,  loose,  or  needs  replacing  for  any  reason 
the  rivets  should  be  heated  to  a  light  yellow  (just  below  white)  color. 
They  may  be  heated  in  the  forges  furnished  with  the  battery  equip- 
ment or  in  a  permanent  blacksmith's  forge.  While  heating  keep  the 
rivets  covered  with  coals  in  order  to  prevent  scaling.  Rivets  one- 
fourth  inch  and  less  in  diameter  may  be  driven  cold  when  it  is  imprac- 
ticable to  heat  them.  Drive  them  hot,  however,  when  practicable. 
Drive  all  rivets  greater  than  one-fourth  inch  in  diameter  hot  in  all 
cases.  Do  not  overheat  or  burn  the  rivets.  Remove  all  scale  from 
rivets  after  heating  and  before  driving.  Drive  the  rivets  home 
with  a  hammer  before  attempting  to  form  the  head.  Hold  rivets 
solidly  in  place  with  a  sledge,  crowbar,  and  fulcrum,  railroad  iron 
or  similar  heavy  piece  of  steel.  Partially  form  the  head  with  the 
face  and  peen  end  of  a  hammer.  When  the  head  is  practically 
formed  by  this  operation  use  a  rivet  set  for  final  forming  of  the  head. 
The  rivet  set  is  only  for  this  final  operation.  Loose  rivets  will  result 
if  they  are  not  peened  down  with  a  hammer  before  the  rivet  set  is 
used.  The  rivets  must  be  held  solidly  in  place  while  the  riveting 
is  being  done,  otherwise  loose  rivets  result. 

Before  starting  to  heat  the  rivets  the  pieces  to  be  riveted  should  be 
carefully  fitted  and  bolted  together.  If  the  holes  in  the  two  pieces 
are  not  in  perfect  alignment  the  cause  should  be  determined  and 
rectified  instead  of  attempting  to  drift  the  pieces  into  alignment. 
If  necessary  for  perfect  alignment  a  slight  amount  of  reaming  or 
filing  will  be  permitted.  In  no  case  should  a  rivet  hole  be  reamed 


83 

larger  than  about  one-sixty-fourth  inch  in  excess  of  the  diameter 
of  the  rivet.  On  account  of  inaccessibility,  it  is  sometimes  difficult 
to  insert  a  rivet.  In  such  cases  it  may  be  inserted  with  a  twisted 
stiff  wire  or  with  a  small  wooden  stick  split  at  the  end  to  hold  the  rivet. 
Arrangements  must  be  made  beforehand  to  back  up  or  hold  the  rivet 
in  place  the  instant  it  is  located  in  order  that  it  may  not  have  cooled 
too  much  for  proper  riveting.  Hot  riveting  is  preferable  to  cold 
riveting  as  the  head  is  more  easily  formed  when  hot  and  the  'contrac- 
tion of  the  rivet  in  cooling  gives  a  tighter  fit. 

SUGGESTIONS    FOR    CARE    AND    MAINTENANCE    OF   MATERIEL. 

Various  suggestions  in  reference  to  the  care  of  this  materiel  and 
hints  regarding  things  to  be  done  or  to  be  avoided  are  scattered 
throughout  the  text  of  this  handbook;  some  of  the  more  important 
are  here  condensed  for  more  convenient  reference.  Careful  compli- 
ance with  these  suggestions  will  avoid  delay  and  possible  injury  to 
personnel  or  materiel. 

The  firing  pin  should  habitually  be  carried  uncocked. 

Recock  carefully  with  a  lanyard  after  a  hangfire  or  a  misfire.  The 
breechblock  should  not  be  opened  for  at  least  one  minute  after  a 
misfire. 

All  work  upon  the  recoil  system,  sights,  and  other  optical  equip- 
ment should  be  done  in  the  presence  of  a  commissioned  officer. 

See  that  proper  kind  of  oil  is  used  in  cylinders  and  for  lubrication. 

Strain  the  oil  used  in  filling  the  cylinders  through  a  fine  clean  cloth 
and  be  sure  that  the  receptacles  used  in  handling  the  oil  are  clean. 

Take  every  precaution  to  keep  the  interior  of  the  cylinders  clean 
and  to  prevent  the  entrance  of  foreign  particles. 

Lash  parts  with  copper  wire  to  prevent  unscrewing. 

Before  firing,  inspect  to  insure  that  cylinders  are  properly  closed 
and  that  the  piston  rods  are  locked  in  place. 

If  time  permits,  oil  slides  before  firing. 

Note  length  of  recoil  for  first  few  shots  to  insure  that  the  recoil 
mechanism  is  working  properly. 

If  the  gun  fails  to  return  fully  into  battery,  it  is  probably  due 
(1)  to  dirt  on  slides  and  guides;  (2)  to  cutting  of  sliding  surfaces  on 
account  of  dirt  and  lack  of  oil;  (3)  to  gland  being  screwed  up  too 
tightly;  (4)  to  dirt  or  foreign  particles  in  the  cylinder;  (5)  to  weak- 
ness of  springs.  Ninety  per  cent  of  such  cases  will  be  found  due  to 
(1),  (2),  or  (3). 

Replace  and  properly  open  all  split  pins  after  replacing  nuts. 

Prevent  possible  injury  to  cannoneers  by  causing  them  to  stand 
clear  of  the  counter-recoil-spring  column  in  'assembling  or  dis- 
mounting. 


84 

Do  not  strike  any  metal  part  directly  with  a  hammer;  interpose  a 
buffer  of  wood  or  copper. 

Frequently  verify  the  adjustment  of  sights  and  quadrant. 

Require  special  care  in  handling  sights. 

Be  sure  that  the  range  strip  of  the  rear-sight  shank  is  graduated 
for  the  particular  type  of  ammunition  used  by  the  battery. 

Do  not  unnecessarily  expose  ammunition  to  the  sun  or  load  it  into 
a  warm  gun  before  time  for  firing;  if  this  is  done,  erratic  shooting 
may  result. 

Battery  commanders  should  frequently  make  a  detailed  inspection 
of  all  of  the  vehicles  in  the  battery  to  see  if  any  part  of  them  are 
broken  and  any  nuts,  screws,  split  pins,  etc.,  missing.  If  any  such 
defects  are  found,  he  should  immediately  take  steps  to  replace  broken 
or  missing  parts.  This  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  and  compliance 
with  these  instructions  will  do  much  toward  prolonging  the  life  of 
the  vehicles. 

All  nuts  are  secured  by  split  pins,  which  should  be  replaced  and 
properly  opened  when  nuts  are  screwed  home. 

See  that  fuzes  are  set  at  safety  for  transport. 

Use  the  small  primer-inserting  press  for  inserting  primers  in  car- 
tridge cases  and  the  decapping  tools  provided  for  removing  old 
primers. 

In  all  requisitions  and  correspondence  the  correct  name  of  the  part 
•  referred  to  (if  known)  should  be  given.  If  the  name  of  the  part  is 
not  known,  submit  a  sketch  showing  the  location,  shape,  materiel,  etc., 
sufficient  to  establish  definitely  the  identity  of  the  parts  in  question. 

The  use  of  the  word  "complete™  in  requisitions  to  signify  a  com- 
bination of  parts  sometimes  leads  to  misunderstanding  of  the  exact 
parts  wanted.  The  tables  of  nomenclature  of  parts  have  been 
arranged  to  show  the  parts  included  under  the  terms  '  'one  trail,  com- 
plete; one  wheel,  complete,"  etc.,  and  should  be  carefully  studied 
before  requisitions  are  made  out  to  insure  that  all  the  parts  wanted 
are  included 'and  duplications  avoided.  For  example,  if  a  piston  rod 
is  wanted,  the  order  should  state  whether  it  is  to  be  with  or  without 
the  piston  head.  If  all  details  are  itemized,  it  will  avoid  mistakes 
and  unnecessary  expense. 

Smokeless  powder  must  not  be  used  for  blank  charges. 

SUPPLIES    IN    GENERAL. 

All  bits,  both  curb  and  snaffle,  are  made  of  27  per  cent  nickel  steel, 
a  practically  noncorrosive  metal. 

The  olive-drab  saddle  blanket  is  regulation  for  all  arms  of  the 
service. 

The  supply  of  ammunition  to  be  kept  on  hand  in  a  2.95-inch-gun 
battery  will  be  a  sufficient  amount  to  fill  all  the  ammunition  chests 


85 

of  the  equipment  and,  in  addition,  a  sufficient  number  of  rounds  to 
cover  the  needs  for  annual  target  practice. 

Pistol  arm  racks, are  issued  for  use  of  Mountain  Artillery  in  such 
number  as  may  be  required  to  hold  the  pistols  on  hand  in  the  battery. 
Each  pistol  arm  rack  holds  80  pistols. 

A  reloading  and  cleaning  outfit  for  2.95-inch  guns  for  removing 
fired  primers  from  and  cleaning  cartridge  cases  and  for  reloading 
blank  ammunition  is  furnished  to  each  battery. 

METHOD    OF    LOADING   THE    BATTERY    EQUIPMENT    ON    RAILROAD    CARS. 

The  equipment  of  a  battery  of  mountain  artillery  can  be  placed  on 
one  freight  box  car  or  two  gondola  cars.  The  first  is  far  preferable, 
as  the  equipment  will  pack  better  and  there  is  cover.  The,  gondola 
cars  should  be  used  only  in  emergency.  In  loading,  the  boxes  in 
which  the  equipment  was  originally  packed  should  be  used  for  long 
trips ;  otherwise  the  following  method  is  suggested : 

The  guns  and  carriages  should  be  assembled  and  located  in  one 
end  of  the  car,  each  carriage  being  blocked  to  the  floor,  the  tools  for 
each  carriage  being  tied  in  a  bundle  and  placed  underneath  the  car- 
riage. The  frames  for  carrying  the  gun,  etc.,  should  be  nested  in 
the  same  end  of  the  car,  together  with  the  sets  of  pack  harness  which 
belong  to  the  same.  Each  set  should  be  tied  together  with  the 
cincha,  the  corona,  saddle  blanket,  etc.,  being  first  folded  inside  of 
the  same.  The  remaining  frames  should  be  similarly  nested  in  the 
other  end  of  the  car.  The  remaining  sets  of  pack  harness  should  be 
tied  as  above  and  packed  one  on  top  of  the  other.  All  packs,  tools, 
etc.,  should  be  lashed  with  rope.  The  ammunition  and  kit  packs 
should  be  the  last  items  packed.  The  ammunition  should  be  placed 
in  the  middle  of  the  car  and  the  kit  packs  thrown  in  to  steady  the 
load. 


EQUIPMENT. 

The  following  table  sets  forth  the  total  equipment  of  one  2.95-inch 
mountain  gun  battery  on  war  footing.  A  column  shows  in  general 
where  each  article  should  be  carried,  but  the  battery  commander 
may  use  his  discretion  as  to  the  disposition  of  such  articles  for  which 
no  particular  fitting  is  provided  or  for  which  no  place  is  shown. 
86 


87 


"c 

rO 
1 

•i 

(3 

1 

O 

r< 

i. 
£ 

<3 
I 
^ 

1 

Property 
classifica- 
tion. 

•uotpas 

N             CS|       OJ                N                                                <M 

»D 

>             £       >               >                                                > 

Combat  train,  mules. 

•sajiddng 
•sepiddng 

•uoniimraray 

t- 

to 

S 

§§                                                        S     •     • 

1 

1 
1 

S 

B 

•jeauoij 
•uonrurrarav 

S 

CO 

~  :::::::: 

•aipBJO 
•unn 

„ 

•(spunod)  qoi38  jo  l\$i<3M. 

:  :  :  :  :  :£  :  :  g 

Name  of  article. 

1   i  i     i  i  il  i    i 

<®           '•       '.              ',       \       !rfl       '           S 

s  for  gun  (see  list  on  p.  91)  
,s  for  carriage  (see  list  on  p.  91)  

Packs  for  one  battery. 

ick  harness  

inder,  model  of  1916  2  
lalter  bridle,  model  of  1910  
jorona,  model  of  1915  
addle  blanket  
iparejo,  model  of  1911  (with  hay,  6  po 
obrejalma,  model  of  1910  
iparejo  cincha,  model  of  1910  
;rupper,  model  of  1912  

otes  on  p.  90. 

*S                                             '    OT    <0         'G 

Bq                      pT^  o  "S  § 

._            r  i 

.^HQ^'—Cj-^CTJcOO}®®                                                                                                  ^ 

illiill^il^ii  ^ 

88 


1 
d 
*£ 

I 

e 

fO 

I 

£ 

"1 
s 

i 

^ 

^? 

i 

0 

^ 

•U 

.£H 

1 
3 

•S 

^ 
1 

GQ 

Property 
classifica- 
tion. 

•uono9g 

•SSBIO 

^                   > 

.^MK(9aoWi 

-      -S          ^^      ^^^^oo^      «So,c,^S 

Combat  train,  mules. 

•»!a 

1 

',               ',        '.!!!!!        I    !  rH    !    I    i 

'** 

e 

•        

•sajiddng 

s 

« 

8 

•— 

! 

>o 
o 

•    •    •    • 

Firing  battery,  mules. 

EQ 

: 

•J99UOTJ 

a 

•n 



•uopTunuiray 

2 

"     :  :  :  :  :      -  !  :  — 

W 

<*> 

" 

:  :  :  :  :^      ^  :  :  :  : 

;  :  :  :  :             :  :  :  : 

'19911  AV 

co 

*"* 

^ 

c, 

-• 

:  :  :  :  :         •"!::! 

'(spunod)  qot?9  jo  ?q3reA\. 

co 

iO                    CO  *C  C^  O        *O        COCO 

co      eo  C3    *  csi    "  I-H      oooi-i    *  1-1  o 

Name  of  article. 

Packs  for  one  battery—  Continued. 
(2)  The  special  pack  equipment: 

«  i  ill!  i     ::::::     i  i  i  :  !  i 
|  i  :•§!  !  i     ::::::     i  i  i  i  :  : 

1 

|l|l{ 

ic     I.--::     i     i§2» 
il     ':  ':  ':  i-i  i     i     ii&J 

^niliiii^i-sfir^lii  i 
"i 

89 


,-I        ,-iO» 


:§ 


"SJ    §  :"s  : 

ImilCU;;; 


• 


P-i        m 


I 


90 


NOTES  FOR  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  TABLE. 


1  Two  hundred  and  sixty-four  rounds  carried  on  wagons. 

2  Ten  blinders  are  issued  per  battery. 

s  The  hay  is  not  furnished  with  the  aparejo. 
One  aparejo  consists  of — 
1  aparejo  body. 

1  aparejo  frama,  (model  of  1911),  comprising— 
1  aparejo  top-stick  body,  right. 
1  aparejo  top-stick  body,  left. 


1  apare 


o  boot-stick  body,  right. 


1  aparejo  boot-stick  body,  left. 

2  aparejo  keys. 

1  apare.  o  top-stick  plate,  right. 
1  aparejo  top-stick  plate,  left. 
1  aparejo  boot-stick  plate,  left. 

1  aparejo  boot-stick  plate,  right. 

2  sets  of  aparejo  ribs  (10  to  the  set). 
2  thongs,  •&  by  64  inches. 

2  thongs,  -&  by  20  inches. 

2  thongs,  -fo  by  16  inches. 

2  thongs,  •&  by  14  inches. 

<  One  heavy  pack  frame  consists  of— 

1  pack-frame  tie-brace,  right. 

1  pack-frame  tie-brace,  left. 

1  pack-frame  pommel. 

1  pack-frame  cantle. 

4  pack-frame  pins  and  split  pins. 

2  pack-frame  sides,  consisting  of — 

4  side  braces. 
2  side  bars. 
2  side-bar  boards. 
2  brace  bars. 
2  brace,  bar  boards. 
4  hook  hinges,  2  right,  2  left. 
6  One  pack  frame,  model  of  1912,  consists  of — 
1  pack-frame  body,  consisting  of— 
2  pack-frame  sides,  comprising — 
4  side  braces. 
2  side  bars. 
2  side-bar  boards. 
2  brace  bars. 
2  brace-bar  boards. 
4  hook  hinges. 
2  arches. 

4  strap-loop  clevises. 
4  pack-frame  pins  with  split  pins. 
4  pack-frame  top  straps. 
4  top-strap  rendering  rings. 
6  Wheel  hanger,  right,  consists  of— 
1  wheel  hanger  yoke. 

1  wheel  hanger  arm. 

2  wheel  hanger  buffer  pieces. 
1  wheel  hanger  hinge  strap. 

1  wheel  hanger  loop. 
1  wheel  hanger  cincha  and  strap. 
*  Wheel  hanger,  left,  consists  of— 
1  wheel  hanger  yoke. 

1  wheel  hanger  arm. 

2  wheel  hanger  buffer  pieces. 
1  wheel  hanger  hinge  strap. 

1  wheel  hanger  "  D  "  ring. 

8  A  number  of  18-pound  projectiles  will  be  issued  in  lieu  of  12.5-pound  projectiles  until  supply  is 
exhausted.  Eight  rounds  of  18-pound  shell  per  pack  are  carried  and  the  number  of  each  on  hand  should 
be  in  proper  proportion. 


91 


List  of  tools  and  accessories,  and  spare  parts  for  the  gun  and  carriage. 


_ 

Name  of  the  article. 

Weight  of  each. 

3S 

!!- 

«ii 

isi 

T> 

Where  carried. 

Number  required 
for  one  battery. 

Property 
classifica- 
tion. 

1 

o 

Section. 

*  Tools  and  accessories  for  gun  and 
carriage. 

Pounds. 
3.75 
5.8 
1 
1.5 
.4 
3.1 

2 

On  wheel  mule         

8 
4 
{ 

4 
4 
4 
8 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 

4 

4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 

4 
4 
1 
1 
8 
8 
4 
4 
4 
4 
1 

1 

1 
1 
4 
8 
1 
1 
1 
1 
4 
4 

4 

4 
40 
8 
4 

4 

1 
1 
1 

1 

1 
12 
4 
1 

1 

IV 

Handspike 

On  trail  mule  ' 

On  gun  mule  

On  cradle  mule 

do       

Cradle  tompions  (set)      

....do  

Piston-rod  protector 

.05 
5.3 
.8 
1.7 
.4 
7.6 

7.6 

1 
1 
1 

1 

1 
1 
1 
1 

do  

On  wheel  mule 

Sponge  brush  cover 

do  

Horizontal  oiler  filled  model  of  1913. 
Muzzle  cover 

On  trail  mule 

Tool  pocket  with  inside  pockets, 
filled. 
Tool  pockets  with  inside  straps, 
filled. 
Drift 

On  cradle  mule               .      ... 

do        

In  tool  pocket  with  inside  straps, 
do 

Hammer 

...  do  

Pinch  bar  and  tommy 

do                                .      . 

Screw  driver 

1 
1 

....  do  

Spanner  and  screw  driver 

do 

Spanner  wrench 

....  do  

Spring  compression  tool 

do 

Steel  drift 

....  do  

Wrench 

do            .... 

Pliers  .             .... 

In  tool  pocket  with  inside  straps. 
do     

File,  dead,  smooth,  6  inches,  3 
square. 
File  hand,  smooth  8  inches  flat 

.  .  do  

.5 

In  gunner's  pouch 

Gunner's  quadrant  pouch 

Carried  where  convenient  

Gunner's  quadrant 

In  quadrant  pouch  

2 
2 
1 
1 
1 

On  cradle  mule 

Oil  can  tubular  filled 

6 
2 
.6 
10.5 

8  8 

On  ammunition  mule  

do 

Gunner's  pouch 

On  trail  mule  

Sight  case  

On  cradle  mule  

Pouch  for  spare  parts 

On  ammunition  mule  

Gunner's  quadrant  chest 

Not  carried  in  field 

Spare  parts  for  gun. 
Carrier  axis  pin  with  split  pin 

Total 
weight 
66 

In    tool   pockets    with    inside 
pockets. 
do  

Extractor  

1  38 

Extractor  axis  pin  with  split  pin.  . 
Firing  pin  

.42 
2.75 
.19  * 
86 

do  

do  

Firing-pin  point 

do  

Guide  plate  

do  

Hand  fever   .... 

2.44 
.56 
.67 
.125 

do  

Hand-lever  axis  pin  with  split  pin  . 
Hand-lever  catch  . 

...do  

.  do  

Hand-lever  catch  pivot  

...do  

Hand-lever  catch  spring 

125 

.  do  

Locking  bolt  \ 

.31 
69 

do        

Locking  boltspring  / 

Main  spring  ... 

.  do... 

Split  pin  for  mechanism  

1 
1  19 

..do  

Trigger  sear  

do  

do  

Trigger,  complete  

do  

Spare  sights. 
Sight  model  of  191? 

10.37 
4  25 



In  spare  sight  chest   

....  do  

Teat  wrench  for  panoramic  sight 

.3 

do  

Spare  parts  for  carriage. 

09 

In  pouch  for  spare  parts  

Axle-tree  lever  with  nut  

2.44 

24 



On  any  ammunition  mule  
In  pouch  for  spare  parts  
In  buffer  spring  case  

3  72 

Cradle  axis  bolt  catch 

17 

In  pouch  for  spare  parts  

Cradle  axis  bolt  catch  lever  ... 

.24 

...do... 

92 


List  ^ft^^ls  and  accessories,  and  spare  parts  for  the  gun  and  carriage — Continued. 


^o 

T3 

s  >> 

Property 

fj 

T3  S 

"3  S 

classifica- 

o> 

£& 

O*£ 

tion. 

Name  of  the  article 

0 

*®  8 

Where  carried 

"^ 

s    II  s^ 

Jg 

d 

•Sf 

® 

IRS 

§s 

1 

-s 

£ 

fe 

^^ 

I 

Spare  parts  for  carnage-  Contd. 

' 

1 

Pounds. 

Cradle  axis  bolt  catch  lever  split 

0.06 



In  pouch  for  space  parts—  Contd. 

4 

£in. 
vating  joint  pin  stop  screw 

06 

..  do   . 

•  4 

Equalizing  spring 

3  5 

do 

4 
2 

Filling  plug  with  chain 

1.31 

do            .     . 

Filling  plug  packing  

.03 
21 

do  

12 
4 

IV 

2 

Lanyard 

do        

Linch  pin  with  spring 

.44 

04 

do 

2 
4 

Piston  screw 

do 

Piston  rod  and  cup  leather  packing. 
Shaft  locking  screw 

.19 
19 

do 

12 
6 

do 

Sleeve  split  pin 

.38 

do 

4 
2 

Bolts,  0.375  by  3  125  with  nuts 

do             

Tools  and  accessories  and  spare  parts  for  the  special  pack  equipment. 


Name  of  part. 

Weight  of  each 
(pounds). 

Number  required 
for  one  gun  or 
carriage. 

Where  carried. 

Number  required 
for  one  battery. 

Property 
classifica- 
tion. 

3 

Section. 

Tools  and  accessories  for  special 
pack  equipment. 
Ax 

In  pioneer  roll,  3  right,  3  left  
In  supply  chest,  saddler's        

24 
2 
8 
4 
1 
2 

1 

3 
4 
3 

2 

6 
20 

1 
8 
1 
12 
4 
2 
12 
12 
4 
10 
11 
4 
4 
14 
1 
2 
12 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
12 
1 
8 

IV 
X 
IV 
IV 
X 

X 

IV 
IV 

X 

}!V 
IV 
}IV 

IV 

1" 

}IV 

}* 

IV 
X 

IV 

9 
10 
2 
9 
9 

10 

2 
9 

10 
2 
9 

2 

9 

2 

10 
2 

9 
9 

9 
9 

Bag  for  hardware 

Ball  peen  hammer.  .          

In  pioneer  roll,  1  right,  1  left  
In  pioneer  roll  1  right  

Bencli  ax 

Blacksmith's  apron  for  saddler 

In  supply  chest,  blacksmith's.  .  . 
do           

Bag  for  nails 

Bag  for  borax  

In  supply  chest,  saddler's  

Bag  for  rivets 

do  

Bag  for  tacks 

do 

Bag  for  sponges,  thread,  and  wax, 
1  each. 
Bag  for  horseshoe  nails 

do        

In  supply  chest,  blacksmith's  .  .  . 
On  ammunition  mules 

Canvas  sack  for  spare  sticks,  filled.. 
Canvas  watering  bucket 

10.2 
1.5 

1  pioneer  mule,  1  kit  mule,  1 
gun  mule. 
In  supply  chest,  blacksmith's  .  .  . 
In  pioneer  roll,  1  right,  1  lett  
On  signal  mule  

Coal  bag  

Cross  peen  hammer 

Field  desk 

97 



Long-handled  shovel 

In  pioneer  roll  3  left        

Long  lifting  bar 

5.2 

1 

On  trail  mule 

Oil  can  rectangular 

In  supply  chest,  miscellaneous  .  . 
In  pioneer  roll,  1  right,  2  left  
In  pioneer  roll,  2  right,  1  left  
In  pioneer  roll  1  left 

Pickax  

Pick  mattock 

Pliers 

Picket  rope  section 

13.5 
12 

77.5 
78.5 
16 



On  ammunition  mule  

Picket  pin  and  eye  

do  

Pioneer  roll,  right 

1 
1 

On  pioneer  mule  

Pioneer  roll  left 

do 

Rigging  cover  .  . 

On  ammunition  mule  

Rope  (50  feet) 

In  supply  chest,  blacksmith's.  .  . 
On  ration  mule  

Ration  crates  

15.5 
4.5 

205 

...„ 

Short  lifting  bar 

On  cradle  and  gun  mules  
On  forge  mule 

Set  of  blacksmith's  tools 

Set  of  carpenter's  tools 

In  supply  chest  tools  

Sledge 

11  5 

Pioneer  roll  left 

Set  of  saddler's  tools 

In  supply  chest  tools  

Supply  chest  blacksmith's 

96 
96 
107 
107 

On  supply  mule 

Supply  chest,  tools 

do  

Supply  chest  miscellaneous 

do 

Supply  chest  saddler's 

do 

Short-handled  shovel 

3  in  pioneer  roll,  right  

Spare  sight  chest 

13.47 

22 

..„. 

On  ammunition  mule 

Lantern  chest,  containing  2  lan- 
terns. 

On  pioneer  mule  1;  remainder  on 
ammunition  mules. 

93 


Tools  and  accessories  and  spare  parts  for  the  special  pack  equipment — Continued. 


Name  of  part. 

Weight  of  each 
(pounds). 

Number  required 
for  one  gun  or 
carriage. 

Where  carried. 

Spare  tools  and  spare  parts  for  spe- 
cial pack  equipment. 

Pack  harness: 
Aparejo  top  stick  — 
Right  1 

6 
2 

In  sacks  for  spare  aparejo  sticks  .  . 
do                                  

Left  

Aparejo  hoot  stick- 
Right 

do 

Left                                     J 

do 

Aparejo  ribs  (sets  of  10  ribs)  .  .  . 

do 

Not  carried  in  field 

do 

Long  lifting  bars 

dn 

Short  lifting  bars 

1           rin 

Repair  links  0.125  wide  (Diamond 
No.  65). 
For  pack  frame,  model  of  1912: 
Hook  hinges 

In  Schaller  forge  tool  chest  

Not  carried  in  field  

Arches 

do 

do 

Pack  frame  pins 

do 

Split  pins,  -jArinch  diameter, 
f-inch  long. 
Side  bar  boards 

do 

do 

do 

Side  bars 

do                                

Brace  liars 

do 

Side  braces 

do             

Heavy  pack  frame: 
Hook  hin^e  right 

do 

Hook  hinge  left 

do            

Side  1  races 

do 

Side  bar 

.  ..  do  

Side-bar  board 

do 

Brace  bar 

do 

Brace-bar  board 

do  . 

Pack  frames  pins 

do 

Split  pins,  ^-inch  diameter 
f-inch  long. 
Steel  rivets,  assorted,  as  follows: 
^-inch  diameter,  §  inch  long, 
round  head. 
\  inch  diameter,  H  inch  long, 
round  head. 
•&  inch  diameter,  •&  inch  long, 
countersunk  head. 
•&  inch  diameter,  fi  inch  long, 
flat  head  (head  \  inch  diam- 
eter, TS  inch  high). 
•&  inch  diameter,  |  inch  long, 
flat  head  (head  \  inch  diam- 
eter, A  inch  high). 

Spare  parts  for  hand  fuze  setters. 
Model  of  1905  M  fuze  setter: 

..     do  

do  

do 

do                           . 

do  

- 

do  

4 
6 

•  In  pouch  for  spare  parts 

Handle  screws 

do 

3 

do 

Corrector  scale  screws 

4 

do        

2 

do                                  

2 

do 

0  063  by  0  47  steel  pins 

2 

do            

4 

do 

2 

do 

4 

do 

4 

do 

Model  of  1912  fuze  setter: 
Range  ring  screws 

12 

..do   .. 

6 

do 

Range  indices 

4 

.  do  

Index  plungers 

4 

do                           

4 

Hn 

Guide-plate  lock  screws 

4           do    

Oil-hole  screws 

8  i         Ho 

8 

do 

StorKnin  screws  .  .  . 

3 

...do... 

sfe 


I1 


60 
M 
120 

rn 

120 


Property 
classifica- 
tion. 


G 

Section. 

>      IV 

ft 

94 

Range-finding  and  fire-control  equipment. 


Name  of  article. 


Property, 
classification. 


Class.     Section. 


Battery  commanders'  ruler,  wooden 

Battery  commander's  telescope  and  mount,  model  of  1904,  1905,  or  1915. 

Case  for  battery  commander's  telescope  and  mount 

Accessories  carried  in  case: 

1  teat  wren?h 

1  pin  wrench 

1  screw  driver 

1  camel's-hair  brush 

Battery  commander's  telescope  tripod 

Case  for  battery  commander's  telescope  tripod 

Flash-lights: 

With  hoods 

Without  hoods 

Time-interval  recorders 

Chains  for  time-interval  recorders 

Tape,  steel,  100  feet 

Aiming  circle 

Case  for  aiming  circle 

Aiming  circle  tripod 

Case  for  aiming  circle  tripod - 

Range  finder,  1  meter  base,  model  of  1916 

Case  for  range  finder 

Range-finder  tripod. 

Case  for  range-finder  tripod , 


1  Will  be  issued  when  available. 

2  Range  finders  will  be  issued  without  requisition  when  available. 


Instruction  equipment. 


Property 

., 

classification. 

"No 

Article. 

Where  carried. 

Class. 

Section. 

1 

Shrapnel  sectionalized  with  fuze           

Not  carried  in  field  

I                 IT 

1 

do                          

/    v 

4 

Individual  personal  equipment. 


No. 

Name  of  article. 

Where  carried. 

Property 
classification. 

Class. 

Section. 

1 
1 
1 

21 
1 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

1 
1 
1 
.•> 

(a)  For  enlisted  men  individually  mounted  on 
horse  or  mule: 
Can  bacon  model  of  1913                   

Carried  by  man        

jix 

VII 
IX 
VII 

}    :x 

1      IX 

'    ix 

1 
2 

1 

2 
3 

1 

2 

Canteen  model  of  1910 

do 

Canteen  cover  dismounted,  model  of  1910  .... 

do 

Cartridge^  ball  pistol 

do 

Cup 

do 

Fork 

do 

Knife                                                

do          

Magazines  pistol  extra 

do 

Meat  can                                              

do        

Pistol 

do 

Pistol  belt,  without  saber  ring     

do  

Pistol  holster 

do 

do 

Spoon 

do 

do 

Furnished  by  Quartermaster's  Department  — 
Identification  tag 

do 

Shelter  tent  half 

i 

Shelter-tent  'pole 

Shelter-tent  r>ees  .  .  . 

95 


Fniividuil  personal  equipment — Continued. 


No. 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
21 
1 
1 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

1 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
11 
1 
1 
1 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

1 
1 
1 
1 

1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

Name  of  article. 

Where  carried. 

Property 
classification. 

Class. 

Section. 

(ft)  For  dismounted  men: 
Bolo 

Carried  by  man 

(•    VII 

IX 
VII 

IX 
VII 

}  IX 

IX 
IX 

IX 

IX 
IX 

5 
1 
2 

1 

2 
3 
1 

5 

5 

5 

5 
5 

Bolo  scabbard  

do 

Can,  bacon,  model  of  1913  

...do... 

Can,  condiment  

.      do 

Canteen,  model  of  1910 

do 

Canteen,  cover,  dismounted,  model  of  1910 

do  

Cartridges,  bail,  pistol  

do 

Cup 

do 

Fork  

do  ...     . 

Haversack,  model  of  1910. 

do 

Knife  

do 

Magazines,  pistol,  extra  

...    do. 

Meat  can  

do 

Pistol 

do 

Pistol  belt,  without  saber  ring 

..      do 

Pistol  holster.. 

do 

Pouch  for  first-aid  packet 

...do... 

Spoon  1         do 

(c)  Horse  equipment  for  each  man  mounted  on  a 
horse: 
Bridle,  field  artillery.  . 

On  horse 

Currycomb... 

do 

Feed  bag  

...do.... 

Grain  bag  

.    do  

Halter  headstall.. 

do 

Halter  tie  rope 

do 

Horse  brush... 

.    do  

Link 

do 

Saddle.  McClellan,  field  artillery.  .  . 

...do.... 

Saddlebags,  pair.  .   . 

.    do  

Saddle  blanket. 

do 

Surcingle 

do 

(d)  Horse  equipment  for  each"  man  mounted  on  a 
mule: 
Currycomb 

On  mule 

Feed  bag  

...  do  

Grain  bag 

do  

Halter-bridle,  model  of  1910  (with  leather  reins)  . 
Horse  brush  

do 

..  do  

Link      . 

do  

Saddle,  mule,  riding  

...do  

Saddlebags,  pair  .  . 

...do.... 

Saddle  blanket. 

.    do  

Surcingle  

do  

(e)  For  bell  and  spare  horses  and  spare  mules: 
Feed  bag.. 

On  horse  . 

Grain  bag 

do 

Halter  headstall  

...do.... 

Halter  tie  rope  .  . 

.    do  

Saddle  blanket  

do  

Surcingle  

do  

(/)  For  pack  mule  in  addition  to  pack  harness  
Currycomb 

On  mule  

.do  

Feed  bag 

do 

Grain  bag  

do  

Horse  brush 

..     .do           ... 

Surcingle 

do 

1  Saddles  to  be  equipped  with  1  stirrup  guidon  socket  per  battery. 


96 


Miscellaneous  equipment. 


No. 

Article. 

Where  carried. 

Property 
classification. 

Class. 

Section. 

1 
4 

1 
1 

1 
1 

1 
1 
2 
1 

18 
U 
1145 

12 
18 

Set  of  decappiiig,  cleaning,  and  priming  tools  con- 
sisting of: 
1  storage  chest                                                          Not  carried  in  field 

V 
V 

X 

X 

„  X 

5 
5 

1 

9 

1  saluting-powder  measure                                         -do        

Subcaliber  and  drill  cartridge  kits,  each  consisting 
of: 

3  drill  cartridges                                    

doa  

do           

1  cleaning  rod                                 

do  

do          

1    0y0pJe(>(J                                                                                                             

do  

do          

In  tin  box— 

..do 

do 

do             

....do  

do          

.  .do  

do          

Marking  outfit,  model  of  19  10,  for  leather,  goods, 
consisting  of: 

1  set  bronze  stamps,  including  all  letters  of  the 
alphabet,  figures  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  0,  star, 
comma,  and  period. 
Marking  outfit,  model  of  1910,  for  metal  goods,  con- 
sisting of: 
1  poplar  chest                                 

Not  carried  in  field  

1  set  steel  stamps,  including  all  the  letters  of 
the  alphabet,  figures  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  0, 

...do  

1  mallet 

do        

do  

Seal  stamp,  consisting  of  handle  and  stamps,  the 

do  

Stencil  outfit,  consisting  of: 

do  

1  set  letter  stencils  A  to  Z,  period,  and  charac- 

do  

1  set  letter  stencils  A  to  Z,  period,  and  charac- 

do          

do  

do          

1  set  numbers  U  to  9,  2  mc   size  

.do  

i  stencil    rus   .  .  .  - 

do  

...do  

do        

..do  

Where  convenient  

(For  targets,  see  0.  O.  Pamphlet  No.  1994.) 
Furnished  by  Quartermaster's  Department:"" 

16  in  supply  chest,  miscella- 
neous. 
4  pounds  in  bag  for  horseshoe 
nails. 

Nails  horseshoes                                  pounds  .  . 

Polo  sets  (see  U  A  E  M  ) 

Not  carried  in  field  
do  

p 

>,x 

5 

2 
5 

Halter  chains  

do  

Fencing  outfits,  infantry,  sets  

do  
do           

do 

1  Issued  when  requested. 


97 


Blicksmith's  tools  for  one  mountain  gun  battery. 


No.  of  article  on 
plate  XXV. 

1 

£ 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

1 
1 
1 
6 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
2 

1 

1 
1 
1 
1 

1 

1 
1 

Name  of  article. 

Where  carried. 

Property  classi- 
fication. 

Class. 

Section. 

...... 

21 
22 

12 

Schaller  forge.  .. 

On  forge  mill  A 

X 

9 

Vise..  . 

do 

Schaller  forge  tool  chest  

do 

Anvil,  34  pounds  .  .  . 

In  Schaller  forge  tool  chest.  . 
do  

Blacksmith's  apron  

Shoeing  box  leather  

do 

Blacksmith's  tool  kit 

do 

Chisel,  handled  for  cold  iron,  1-pound  6- 
ounce. 
Clinch  cutter  .  .  . 

In  blacksmith's  tool  kit  
do 

Clinching  iron 

do 

Creaser,  steel,  handled 

do 

Drills,  flat  . 

For  garrison  use  onlv 

2 
13 
19 
17 

18 
16 
8,10 
5 
6 

""26" 
11 
1 

File,  12-inch,  flat,  second-cut  

In  blacksmith's  tool  kit.  .. 
do 

File,  8-inch,  three-square,  taper 

Fire  rake 

do 

Fire  shovel  

do 

Hammer,  rounding,  14-inch  handle,  2-pound 
Hammer,  shoeing  

do 

do  

Handles,  spare,  for  cold  chisel 

do 

Hardie,  0.562  (&),  square  shank,  1-inch  bit.  . 

do  

Pritchel,  0.562  (^),  flats,  9-inch          

do..   .. 

Ratchet  drill  for  square-shank  drill 

For  garrison  use  only  
In  blacksmith's  tool  kit  
do 

Shoeing  knife 

Shoeing  pincers  

Shoeing  rasp,  16-inch 

do 

Tool  kit  for  Schaller  forge 

In  Schaller  forge  tool  chest  .  . 
In  blacksmith's  tool  kit  
do  

14 
7 
3 
15 

Tongs,  horseshoer's. 

Whetstone,  farrier's,  10-inch  

Wrench,  screw,  8-inch,  knife-handled 

do  

Cutting  nippers,  14-inch 

do 

Carpenter's  tools  for  one  mountain  gun  battery. 


No.  of  article  on 
plate  XXII. 

Number. 

Name  of  article. 

Where  carried. 

Property  classi- 
fication, 

Class. 

Section. 

12 

9,10, 
11,16 
6 
5 
17 
15 
7 

18,'i9," 
21,22 
23 
...„ 

4 
..... 

~"i4~" 

24 
20 
13 

3 

1 

1 

I6 

1 

1 
1 

1 
1 
3 

}4 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

Carpenter's  tool  kit  

In  supply  chest  tools 

X 

9 

Bevel,  8-inch  

In  carpenter's  tool  kit  
do  

Bits,  auger,  6  sizes  

Bit,  double,  2-inch 

do 

Bit,  expansive,  two  cutters  

do  

Bit,  screw-driver,  size  0.375  inch  . 

do 

Bit,  wood,  countersink,  0  625  inch 

do 

Brace,  ratchet,  10-inch  sweep  

.do  

Chisels,  socket  framing,  three  sizes 

In  supply  chest  tools 

Drills,  twist,  sizes  A,  A,  A,  and  &  inch  
File,  saw,  6-inch  

In  carpenter's  tool  kit    .  . 

do 

File,  10-inch,  flat,  bastard 

In  supply  chest  tools 

Hammer,  claw,  bell  face  

In  carpenter's  tool  kit 

Handle  tool  containing  10  tools  .  . 

do 

Handle,  file  aluminum 

In  supply  chest  tools 

Knife,  drawing,  folding  and  adjustable  han- 
dle. 
Oilstone,  unmounted 

In  carpenter's  tool  kit 

In  supply  chest  tools  
..do.. 

Plane,  smoothing,  wood  

Rasp,  wood,  10-inch. 

do 

Rule  boxwood  2-foot  4-fold 

In  carpenter's  tool  kit  
do   

Saw,  crosscut,  20-inch  

Saw  set  . 

do 

Screw  driver  5-inch  blade  10-inch 

do 

Square,  steel,  12-inch  body,  8-inch  tongue. 

.do 

Wrench,  screw,  12-inch 

In  suppl  jf  chest  tools 

61714—16- 


98 


S'liiler's  tools  for  one  mountain  gun  battery. 


|B 

n 

i!_ 

4,5,6, 
7,8,9, 
32 
3S 
24 
22 
10 
29 
20 
21 
32 
2 
16 
3s 
...... 

"32" 
32 
32 
32 
32 
32 
27 
17 
31 
33,  34, 

V 

37 
30 
12 
13 

18 
25 
26 

Bi 

85, 
23 
32 

Number. 

Name  of  article. 

' 

Where  carried. 

Property  classi- 
fication. 

Class. 

Section. 

i1: 

i 

2 
2 
2 
12 
1 
1 

}; 

i 
i 
i 
i 
i 
l 
l 
l 
l 
l 

2 

Saddler's  tool  kit  sheepskin 

In  supply  chest  tools  
In  saddler's  tool  kit  

do 

X 

9 

Awl  blades,  harness,  assorted,  Nos.43  to  48, 
inclusive. 

Awl  seat  handled                            

.      do 

Carriage  pricking  3  wheels 

do 

Compass  6-inch                         

.      do 

Creaser  double  lignum  vitse 

do 

Edge  tool  No  1                    

do 

Edge  tool  No  2 

do 

Extra  blades  with  followers  for  draw  gauge 

do                . 

Gauge  draw  brass  without  guard 

do 

Hammer  No  3  riveting                 

do 

Handle  peg  awl  with  wrench 

do 

Hafts  patent  awl,  with  wrench 

do          

Knife  round 

do 

Knife  splitting  6-inch            ,   . 

In  supply  chest  tools  

Needlecise  leather 

In  saddler's  tools  kit 

Needles  glover's  No  3,  paper 

do       

Needles  harness  No  4  papers 

do 

Needles,  harness,  No.  5,  papers  

Needles  harness  No  6  papers 

do  

do 

Needles  sacking  assorted 

do       

Nipper^  cuttintr  10-inch 

do 

do 

Pliers  6-inch 

do 

Punches  round  assorted 

do             

do 

Rivet  set 

do                    .  

do 

do 

Slicker  steel'                                         ' 

.do  

Shears  10-inch  bent  trimmers 

do                

Shoe  knife  broad  point 

..do  

do             

Stitching  clamp 

..do  

do                    

Tool  claw 

.  ..do  

Thimbles  best  aluminum-lined  steel  2  sizes 

do                

Allowance  for  six  months  of  cleaning  and  preserving  materials  for  one  mountain  butter)/. 


Num- 
ber. 

Article. 

Where  carried. 

Property  classi- 
fication. 

In  pack. 

In 

store. 

Class. 

Section. 

21 

3 

1 
1 

1 

1 
1 

2 
6 
2 
1 

1 

2 
2 
2 
2 
6 
6 
8 
1 
4 
2 
I 
2 
15 

Carried  where  convenient  .  . 

X 

10 

i  pound  in  supply  chest, 
saddler's. 

2* 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

Brush  sash  No  3                         j  

Burnei  s,  laitern,  Dietz  Vesta  

In  supply  chest,  tools  

P.orriprl  whp.rp.  p.rvnvp.nip.nt 

2 
1 
1 

Cloth  emery  No  J                             do                 

Cloth'  emery  No.  0                  .  .   ...do  

Cloth  emery  No  00                           do 

In  supply  chest,  miscellane- 
ous. 

rln 

do                    

In  supply  chest,  tools  

..„.. 

B 

8 
1 
4 
2 
1 
2 
13 

Naphthaline                                   poun  '  ^                                  

Oil,  clock,  ounce,  1  -ounce  bottle  
Oil  hvdroline  ^aliens  5-gallon  cans 

Oil  Unseed  raw  1-pint  cans                                             

Oil'  lubricating  '                            gallons  

Oil  neat's-foot                                    do 

2  in  -uipply  chest,  miscella- 
neous. 

99 


Allowance  for  six  months  of  cleaning  and  preserving  materials  for  one  mountain  battery — 

Continued. 


Num- 
ber. 

Article. 

Where  carried. 

Property  classi- 
fication. 

In  pack. 

In 

store. 

Class. 

Section. 

2 
2 
1 

40 
3 

? 

40 

1 
1 

28 

4 
24 
6f> 
5 

25 
5 

Oil,  slushing,  light  gallons 

2 
2 

X 

10 

Oil,  coal                                               do 

Oil,  sperm  do  . 

In  supply  chest,  miscella- 
neous. 

Paint,  olive-drab,  third-coat  pounds  . 
Paint,  rubberine,  gallons  (1  gallon  cans) 

40 

1 

40 
1 
1 

Petrolatum  (vaseline)  ounces  (in  tin  box). 
Polish.  Gibson's  soap,  16-ounce  cans  
Sal  soda,  pounds,  bulk  

2  in  supply  chest,  tools    . 

Sand  paper  No.  U                            quire 

Sand  paper  No.  00  do... 

Soap,  castile  pounds.  . 
Soap,  H.  &  H.  cakes  or  "Paco" 

4  pounds,  in  supply  chest, 
blacksmith's. 
8  pounds  in  supply  chest, 
miscellaneous. 
In  supply  chest,  miscella- 
neous. 
10  pounds  in  supply  chest, 
blacksmith's. 
5  in  supply  chest,  saddler's.. 
2  in  supmy  chest,  miscella- 
neous." 
3  in  supply  chest,  saddler's.. 

16 

Soap,  saddle,  Frank  Miller's  pounds.  . 
Sponges,  4-inch  

14 
60 

Sponges,  large  size  5t  or  6  inch 

2  pounds  in  supply  chest, 
tools. 
4.75  pounds  in  supply  chest, 
blacksmith's. 
1.75  pounds  in  supply  chest, 
miscellaneous. 
In  supply  chest   tools 

Wicks,  lantern,  size  0 

16.5 

Allowance  for  six  months  of  saddler's  material  for  one  mountain  battery. 


Num- 
ber. 

6 
2 
6 
8 
5 
12 
6 
3 
2 
7 
3 
2 
5 
1 
9 
6 
3 
2 
12 
5 
10 
3 
10 
5 
20 

10 

18 

14 
2 
10 
19 

Article. 

Where  carried. 

Property  classi- 
fication. 

In  pack. 

In 

store. 

Class. 

Section. 

Awl  blades,  harness,  assorted 

6 

X 
X 

^9 
10 

Buckles,  bar,  1-inch,  saalbach  

In  supply  chest,  saddler's.  . 

Buckles,  bar,  tongueless,  f-inch 

do 

Buckles,  bar,  tongueless,  1-inch  

do  

Buckles,  bar,  tongueless,  1  J-inch 

do                            ... 

Buckles,  center  bar  f-inch 

do 

Buckles,  center  bar,  f-inch  

..   ..do  

Buckles,  center  bar,  f-inch.. 

do 

Buckles,  center  bar,  1-inch  „  

...do... 

Buckles,  center  bar,  l|-inch  

..    .do  

Buckles,  center  bar,  1  f-inch 

do 

Buckles,  roller,  f-inch  

do  

Buckles,  roller,  f-inch... 

do 

Buckles,  roller,  1-inch 

do 

Buckles,  roller,  1^-inch  

.  ..do  

Buckles,  satchel,  J-inch 

do 

Buckles,  wire,  ^-inch 

do 

Buckles,  wire,  f-inch  

.      do...                

Buckles,  wire,  f-inch 

do 

Buckles,  roller,  tongueless,  f-inch  

do  

Cincha  straps  aparejo 

10 

Cheek  "D" 

In  supply  chest,  saddler's  .  .  . 
do 

X 

10 

Chock  plates  upper  and  lower  steel 

Chock  staples  

-  do...                    

Duck  cotton,  olive-drab,  26-inch,  No.  8, 
yards. 
Duck  cotton,  olive-drab,  22-inch,  No.  2, 
yards. 
Duck  cotton,  olive-drab,  22-inch,  No.  1, 
yards. 
End  buckles,  1-inch.. 

20 

In  supply  chest,  saddler's  

do                            ! 

do  .. 

End  clips,  f-inch 

do 

End  clips,  1-inch  

...do... 

End  clips,  IJ-inch... 

...do... 

100 


Allowance  for  six  months  of  saddler's  material  for  one  mountain  battery — (  ontiri  <><!. 


Num 
ber. 


Article. 


Where  carried. 


In  pack. 


Foot  staple,  high In  supply  chest,  saddler's 

Foot  staple,  low do. . . : >     IX 

Foot  staple,  semicircular do 

Hafts,  patent  awl,  No.  146,  with  wrench do 1 

Hook,  end,  brass  wire do IX 

Hook,  wire  (for  link) do IV 

Leather,  bridle,  backs 1  back  in  sup  ply  chest,  tools.. 

Leather,  collar,  backs 1  v 

Leather  harness,  backs pounds . .    1  back  in  supply  chest,  tools . .     0) 

Leather,  latigo side . .    In  supply  chest,  saddler's . . . 

Nails,  saddle do 

Needle,  glover's  No.  3,  paper In  saddler's  tool  kit 

Needle,  harness,  No.  4,  papers do X 

Needles,  harness,  No.  5,  papers do. 

Needles,  harness,  No.  6,  papers do. 

Ornaments,  brow  band,  copper In  supply  chest,  saddler's . . . 

Ovals,  saddle do f      IX 

Ovals,  saddle  bag do. 

Pins,  screw  brass,  ^-inch,  No.  2, 1  gross do. 

Rendering  ring,  ljj-inch  diameter do. 

Ring,  |  -inch  diameter,  saddle-bag do. 

Ring,  I  Hnch  diameter,  saddle do. 

Ring,  If-inch  diameter,  throat  strap do. 

Ring,2-inchdiameter,halter do 

Ring,4-inch  liameter, quarter>trap do. 

Ring,  T>,  1-inch  diameter,  feed  bag do 

Rivets  and  burs,  brass,  J-inch,  No.  10,    do 

pounds. 
Rivets  and  burs,  brass,  f-inch,  No.  10,    do 

pounds. 

Rivets  and  burs,  brass,  f-inch,  No.  10,    do 

oval  head,  pounds. 
Rivets  and  burs,  brass,  1-inch,  No.  8,    do 

oval  head. 
Rope,  f-inch,  halter,  bridle,  manila  hemp,     Carried  where  convenient 

feet. 

Rope,  J-inch,  halter,  manila  hemp... feet do 

Screw,  brass,  1-inch,  No.  6 gross. .    In  supply  chest,  saddler's \ 

Sheepskins  with  wool  on do 6   / 

Shields,  saddle,  11-inch ] do. 

Shields,  saddle,  HWnch I do. 

Shields,  saddle,  12-inch do. 

Snap  hook,  canteen,  cavalry do. 

Snap,  German,  1-inch do 

Snap  hook,  haversack,  1-inch do 

Snap,  swivel,  oval  loop,  IJ-inch do 

Snap,  swivel.  1-inch,  No.  16 do \ 

Snap,  German,  1-inch do / 

Squares,  halter do. 

Straploop  (feed  bag)  1  by  |  inch,  brass  wire do !•      IX 

Stud,  saddle  bag do. 

Tacks,  copper,  No.  12,  ^-pound  paper. .....  I do. 

Tacks,  copper,  No.  20,  |-pound  paper ; do , 

Thimble,  aluminum  lined,  steel do 

Thread, carpet, No.  18, olive-drab.. pounds.!  In  supply  chest,  saddler's, 

}  pound. 

Thread,  shoe,  No.  3,  brown pounds. . !  In  supply  chest,  saddler's . . . 

Thread,  shoe,  No.  10,  brown pounds.. do 

Wax,  stitching,  brown  winter . .  .pounds . .    1  pound  in  supply  chest,  sad-         1  v 

dler's. 
Webbing,  olive-drab,  cotton,  heavy,   f-     In  supply  chest,  saddler's. .. 

inch,  yards. 

Webbing,  olive-drab,  cotton,  heavy,   1-     5  yards  in  supply  chest,  sad- 
inch,  yards.                                                      dier's. 
Webbing,  olive-drab,  halter,  1%  inches,  ! do 

yards. 
Webbing,  olive-drab,  jute,  3^  inches,  yards. 

For  polo  equipment. 

Buckles,  wire,  >>-inch ' In  supply  chest,  saddler's . . . 

Buckles,  wire,  f  inch do 

Buckles,  Avire,  ?-inch do 

Buckles,  wire,  |-inch do 

Buckles,  nickel-plated,  stirrup  plate.  If-    do       v 

inch. 

Buckles,  nickel-plated,  girth,  1-inch do 

Ring.  |-inch  diameter do 

Web,  linen,  straining,  3^  inches yards. do 

Weh.  H^en.  straining;. . r> "inches yards..      ...do 


In 

store. 


Property  classi- 
fication. 


Class. 


Section. 


10 


10 


inder. 


101  '-:^<\  V-.      'U:' 

Reserve  supply  for  war'«eryi(^  ,      :''-';  i.;  !\t  *  /*» 


Article. 


Where  carried. 


Buckles,  bar,  toiigueless,  f-uich In  store  1 

Buckles,  bars,  tongueless,  1-inch j do 

Buckles,  center  bar,  f-inch do 

Buckles,  center  bar,  f-inch do 

Buckle,  center  bar,  |-inch do 

Buckles,  center  bar,  IJ-inch do 

Buckles,  center  bar,  If-inch do, 

Buckles,  roller,  1  J-inch do 

Buckles,  roller,  tongueless,  f-inch do 

Buckles,  f-inch,  wire do 

Burner,  lantern,  Dietz  Vesta do 

Cheek  "  D  " do 

Chamois  skin  not  smaller  than  13  by  17  inches do 

Chock  plate,  upper  and  lower do 

Chock  staple do 

Dressing,  russet  leather,  boxes,  16-ounce do 

End  buckle do 

Globe  lantern do 

Hook,  double,  brass  wire do 

Hook,  end,  brass  wire do 

Leather,  bridle,  backs do 

Leather,  collar,  backs do 

Leather,  harness,  backs,  pounds do 

Leather,  latigo,  side do 

Nails,  saddle do 

Oil,  clock,  ounce,  1-ounce  bottles do 

Oil,  hydroline,  gallons,  5-gallon  cans do 

Oil,  neatsfoot,  gallons,  1  and  2  gallon  cans do 

Oil,  slushing,  light,  gallons,  1  and  2  gallon  cans do 

Oil,  sperm,  gallons do 

Oil,  coal,  gallons do 

Oil,  lubricating,  gallons do 

Ornament,  brow  band do 

Ring,  |-inch  diameter,  saddlebag do 

Ring,  IJ-mch  diameter,  halter do 

Ring,  2-inch  diameter,  halter do 

Ring,  4-inch  diameter,  cincha  strap do 

Ring,  4-inch  diameter,  quarter  strap do 

Ring,  "D,"  1-inch  diameter,  feed  bag do 

Rivets  and  burs,  brass  belt,  |-mch,  No.  10,  pounds do 

Rivets  and  burs,  brass,  f-inch,  No.  10,  pounds do 

Sal  soda,  pounds,  bulk do 

Snap  hook,  haversack,  1-inch do IX 

Snap,  swivel,  oval  loop,  IJ-mch do 

Snap  hook,  feed  bag,  German  pattern  1-inch do 

Squares,  halter do 

Soap,  castile,  pounds do 

Soap,  H.  &  H.  cakes  or  "Paco" do 

Soap,  saddle,  Frank  Miller'?,  pounds do !•       X 

Sponges,  5-inch do 

Strap  loop,  feed  bag,  1  by  Hinch,  ware do i      TY 

Stud,  saddlebag do [ 

Tacks,  copper,  12-ounce,  papers do 

Tacks,  copper,  20-ounce,  papers do 

Thread,  carpet,  No.  18,  olive-drab,  pounds do 

Thread,  shoe,  No.  3,  brown,  pounds ] do 

Thread,  shoe,  No.  10,  brown,  pounds do 

Waste,  cotton,  pounds,  white do 

Wax,  stitching,  pounds,  brown,  winter do 

Wick,  lantern,  size  0 do 


Property  classifi- 
cation. 


Class.     Section. 


10 


1  No  material  will  be  drawn  from  this  supply  for  making  repairs  and  replacements,  except  in  sudden 
calls  for  field  service  if  necessary  to  replace  missing  items  of  the  regular  supplies.  To  avoid  deterioration, 
all  perishable  articles  should  be  replaced  by  similar  ones  received,  with  the  regular  six  months' allowance. 


INDEX. 


A. 

Page. 

Accessories  for  the  gun  and  carriage,  list  of 65,  91 

Accessories  for  the  special  pack  equipment,  list  of 76,  92 

Adjusting  instruments. 63 

Adjustment  of  sights 60 

Additional  tests 63 

Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1904 61 

Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1915 61 

Open  sight '. 60 

Verification  of  parallelism  of  lines  of  sight  and  axis  of  bore 62 

Ammunition 16-18, 102 

Allowance  of 79 

Blank  metallic 24 

Fixed,  as  issued 16 

Marking  packing  boxes 23 

Misfires  and  hangfires 27 

Target '. 79 

Ammunition  chests,  description 75,  89 

Aperejo,  model  of  1911: 

Description 68,  87 

Instructions  for  setting  up 69-72 

Aparejo  cincha,  model  of  1910,  description 69,  87 

Axle  rest,  function 74,  88 

Axletree: 

Description 37-42 

Dismounting 43 

Mounting 43 

Axletree  lever  catch,  function 37,  42 

Axletree  lever,  description 37,  42 

Axletree  lever  securing  straps,  function 75,  88 

B. 

Blacksmiths'  tools,  list  of % 92,  97 

Blacksmiths'  tool  kit,  description 77 

Blinder,  model  of  1916,  description 67,  87 

Brake  ropes,  description 65,  91 

Breech  block,  description 13 

Breech  mechanism: 

Action 14-15 

Dismounting 15-16 

Mounting 16 

Parts  in 12 

Serial  list  of  component  parts 12 

Buffer  cap,  location 37,  39 

Buffer  cylinders -. 37,  39 

To  fill 44 

Care 45 

Buffer  spring,  location 37,  40 

Buffer  spring  case,  description 65,  91 

(103) 


104 

c. 

1  ige 

Canvas  sack  for  spare  sticks 76,  92 

Care  and  management  of  materiel,  suggestions  for 83,  84 

Cargo  cincha,  short,  description , 74,  88 

Cargo  cincha,  long,  description 74,  88 

Carpenters'  tools,  list  of 92,  97 

Carpenter's  tool  kit,  description 78 

Carriage: 

General  description 39 

Nomenclature 37,  38 

Principal  parts  of 39 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 37 

Carrier,  description 13 

Cartridge  case: 

Description. 16,  24 

Blank  metallic  ammunition,  care 26,  27 

Blank  metallic  ammunition,  use 24 

Catch  button : 38,  42 

Chest  for  fire-control  equipment 76,  89 

Contents,  list  of 5-6 

Corona,  model  of  1915,  description 67,  87 

Cradle: 

Description 39,  40 

Dismounting 43 

Mounting 43 

Cradle  axis  bolt: 

Description 37,  40 

Catch,  description 37,  40 

Cradle  eyebolt,  function 37,  39 

Cradle  tompions,  description 65,  91 

Crupper,  model  of  1912,  description 69,  86 

Cup  leather  packing,  location v 37,  40 

Cup  leather  seating,  description 37,  40 

Cup  ring,  location : 37,  40 

Cylinder  liner,  description 37,  40 

D. 

Decapping,  cleaning,  and  priming  tools,  set  of 27,  96 

Distance  plates 38,42 

Drag  washer,  location 37,  42 

Drain  plugs,  location 37,  44 

Drill  cartridge: 

Description 35 

Use... 

Dummy  pack,  description 

E. 

Elevating  bevel  wheel,  function 38,  41 

Elevating  gear 38,  40 

Elevating  handwheel,  location 38,  41 

Elevating  joint  pin,  function 38,  41 


105 


Elevating  mechanism,  care 45 

Elevating  pin,  description 38,  41 

Elevating  pinion,  location 38,  41 

Elevating  quadrant,  description 38,  40 

Elevating  sleeve,  location 38,  41 

Elevating  spindle,  description 38,  41 

Elevating  worm,  description 38, 41 

Elevating  worm  spring,  function 38,  41 

Elevating  worm  spring  cup,  location 38,  41 

Equalizing  spring,  description 38,  41 

Equalizing  spring  carrier,  location 38,  41 

Equipment: 

For  description,  division  of 9 

Horse,  list  of 95 

Individual,  personal,  list  of 94,  95 

Instruction,  list  of 94 

List  of 9 

Miscellaneous,  Hat  of 96 

Polo .- 96 

Range  finding  and  fire  control,  list  of 94 

Statement  of  total 87-89 

Extractor,  description 14 

F. 

Fastening  straps,  description 74,  88 

Felloe  segment 38,43 

Field  desk 76, 89,  92 

Filling  plug,  location 37,  44 

Firing  pin,  description 13 

Front  crosspiece,  description '  38,  41 

Front  handles,  location 38,  42 

Fuze,  base  percussion 23 

Fuze,  Frankford  Arsenal,  combination,  model  of  1907  M 19 

Fuze,  Frankford  Arsenal,  combination,  model  of  1915 22 

Fuze  setter,  hand,  model  of  1905  M 28 

Fuze  setter,  hand,  model  of  1912 30-33 

G. 

General  information 80-85 

Gland,  location 37,40 

Guide  arm,  location 38,  41 

Guide  plate,  description 14 

Gun: 

Dismounting 43 

Mounting 43 

Nomenclature 11 

Gun  and  ammunition  weights,  dimensions,  etc 11 

Gun  body,  description 

Gunner's  pouch,  description 65,  91 

Gunner's  quadrant,  description 65,  66,  91 

Gunner's  quadrant  pouch 66,  91 


106 

H. 

Vuge. 

Halter  bridle,  model  of  1910,  description 67,  86 

Hand  lever,  description 13 

Handspike,  description 66,  91 

Handspike  key,  location 38,  42 

I. 

Individual  equipment,  list  of 94 

Instruction  plate,  function 37,  40 

L. 

Lair  rope Mj 

Lash  cincha,  description 75,  89 

Leather: 

Black,  care  of 72 

Russet,  care  of 72 

Reasons  for  oiling 72 

Lash  rope,  description 73,  88 

Lifting  bar,  description 76.  90 

Linch  pin,  description 37,  42 

Load  strap,  function 75,  88 

Loading  of  battery  equipment  on  railroad  cars 85 

Locking  bolt,  description 14 

M. 

Marking  outfit,  list  of 96 

Mainspring,  description. 14 

Material? 

Cleaning  and  preserving,  6  months'  allowance,  list  of 98,  99 

Saddler's  allowance.  6  months,  list  of 99, 100 

N. 

Name  plate,  description 38,  42 

O. 

Oil,  for  recoil  cylinder 44.  45 

Oil  can  case  carrier,  location 38,  42 

Oils  for  artillery  mate'riel 81 

Open  sight: 

Care 58 

Description 48 

Use 58 

P. 

Pack  covers,  description 73,  89 

Pack  frame,  model  of  1912,  description 73-74,  88 

Pack  frame,  heavy,  description 73,  88 

Pack  harness,  parts  in 67,  87 

Painting  artillery  mate'riel 80,  81 

Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1904: 

Care 58,  59 

Description 49 

Use 58 

Panoramic  sight,   model  of  1915: 

Care 58.  59 

Description 

Use..                                                                                                              58 


107 

Page. 

Picket  pin  and  eye,  function 76,  92 

Picket-rope  section,  description 76,  92 

Pioneer's  rolls,  description , 77-89 

Piston  head,  location 37, 40 

Piston  lock,  function 37, 40 

Piston  rod: 

Description. 32,  40 

To  remove  from  buffer  cylinders 44 

To  replace  in  buffer  cylinders 44 

Piston  rod  handle 37 

Piston-rod  packing,  location 37,  40 

Plates,  arrow 37,  40 

Plates,  list  of 7 

Pouch  for  spare  parts,  description 78,  91 

Powder  charge,  composition  of 18 

Primer,  general  description  of 16,  25 

Primer,  110-grain  percussion: 

Description 17 

Action 17 

Primer,  saluting,  care  in  use  of 25 

Projectiles 18 

R. 

Range-finding  and  fire-control  equipment 94 

Range  table  for  12^-pound  projectile 29 

Range  table  for  18-pound  projectile 34 

Reloading  and  cleaning  outfit: 

Parts  in 27 

Use  of  parts  in 27 

Repairs  for  field-artillery  materiel 82 

Reserve  supply  for  war  service,  list  of 101 

Rigging  cover,  description 76,  92 

Riveting,  instruction  for 82,  83 

Rope 92 

S. 

Saddle  blanket,  description 68,  86 

Saddler's  tools,  list  of : - 98 

Saddler's  tool  kit 78 

Saluting  primer  percussion,  description 25 

Schaller  forge,  description 77,  97 

Schaller-forge  tool  chest,  description 77,  97 

Scraper,  location -  -  -  38,  41 

Shell,  12^-pound,  description 18 

Shell,  18-pound,  description IS 

Shoe,  description 38,  41 

Shoe  handle,  location 38.  42 

Shrapnel,  earlier  design,  description 

Shrapnel,  common. 

Description 1& 

Action 19 

Side  plates,  description 38, 41 

Sight-bracket  base,  location 37,  39 

Sight  case,  description 66,  91 

Sight  chest,  spare 76,  89 


108 

Page. 

Sight,  model  of  1912 47 

Sight  scroll  gear 47 

Sight  shank,  description 47 

Sight-shank  range  strip 48 

Sight-shank  socket,  description 48 

Sling  rope 73,  89 

Sobrejalma,  model  of  1910,  description 68,  69 

Spare  parts : 

For  carriage,  list  of 91 

For  gun,  list  of 91 

For  hand  fuze  setter 93 

Slight 91 

For  special  pack  equipment 93 

Special  pack  equipment 73,  88 

Subcaliber  and  drill  cartridge  kit,  contents 36,  96 

Subcaliber  cartridge : 

Ammunition  used 35 

Care 35 

Description 34 

Supply  chest,  saddler's 76,  89,  92 

Supply  chest,  blacksmith's 76,  89,  92 

Supply  chest,  miscellaneous 76,  89, 92 

Supply  chest,  tools 78,  92 

Supplies  in  general 84,  85 

Support,  function 38,  41 

Supporting  plates 38, 42 

T. 

Targets 79 

Thongs 73,89 

Tools: 

For  gun  and  carriage,  list  of 91 

For  special  pack  equipment .  76,  92 

Tool  pockets,  description 66, 91 

Trail,  description -  38,  41 

Trail  pad,  description -  74,  88 

Transoms,  front  and  rear -  38,  41 

Trigger,  description 

Trigger  sear,  description 

Tubular  oil  can,  description .  66,  91 

Tubular  oil  can  carrier,  description 66,  91 

W. 
Wheels: 

Care  and  precautions 

Description 38,  42 

Dismounting 43 

Mounting 43 

Wheel  hanger,  description -  74,  88 

Wheel  tie  strap,  description 74,  88 

June  10, 1912. 

Revised  September  15, 1916. 

Form  No.  1761. 

Ed.  Sept.  1-M6  s<)0. 


ADDITIONAL  COPIES 

OF  THIS  PUBLICATION  MAY  BE  PROCURED  FROM 

THE  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  DOCUMENTS 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

WASHINGTON,  D.  C. 

AT 

20  CENTS   PER   COPY 
V 


YC  64307 


Pi 
2-i  ^  \n 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY  \0[  \  ( 


